JP2021159618A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing interest of a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine includes main control means that performs a lottery for a game according to the fact that a game medium enters a first start winning port or a second starting winning port, changes a first special symbol based on ball entry into the first start winning port or a second special symbol based on ball entry into the second start winning port according to a lottery result, and can control a game state to a special game state advantageous to a player according to the fact that a display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a predetermined special display mode. When the main control means can control the game state to the special game state on the basis of one of the first special game state or the second special game state and the other special symbol is being changed, the main control means performs processing in which the display result of the other special symbol is forcibly made a losing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), It is provided that the player shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-113326

However, conventionally, new models of gaming machines have been intermittently demanded in the market, and there is a demand for improving the interest of gaming in the new models.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A lottery related to the game is performed according to the entry of the game medium into the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and the first based on the entry into the first starting winning opening according to the lottery result. The second special symbol based on the special symbol or the entry into the second starting winning opening is changed, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has become a predetermined special display mode. It is equipped with a main control means that can control a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player accordingly.
The main control means is processing that the special gaming state can be controlled based on one special symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the other special symbol is changing. In the case of, it is characterized in that the process of forcibly losing the display result of the other special symbol is performed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above right in the forward direction. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the forward direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko game machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 1st pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko machine. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbol in the first pachinko gaming machine, and is (A) the variation pattern table of the special symbol for the low start, and (B) the variation pattern table of the special symbol for the high start. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (3) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (4) which shows an example of the main control main processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial setting process at the time of startup in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the electric power failure processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (No. 1) which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the external masqueradable interrupt processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting control processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st normal game pre-processing in the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd normal game pre-processing in the 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal state monitoring processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control circuit processing in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the output condition of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the timing chart of the signal of "Prize ball information 1" among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the outline of the error in the 1st pachinko gaming machine. It is a table which shows an example of the output condition of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 2nd pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 2nd pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 2nd pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 2nd pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the 3rd pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for a special symbol in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in the 3rd pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in the 3rd pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in a 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning device opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in a 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing in the 3rd pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example. Is the first open mode, (B) the open mode of the specific region is the second open mode, and (C) the open mode of the specific region is the third open mode. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. This is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. Another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and is (A) another example of the time chart of the specific area. It is a figure which shows the case where the opening mode is a 1st opening mode, and (B) the case where the opening mode of a specific area is a 2nd opening mode. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a sensor holding member, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. This is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the sensor holding member when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a ball entry port member, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a plurality of ball entrance members, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the front direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the inside of a sorting member which is an example of a game device when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the inside of a sorting member which is an example of a game device when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of the side view of the distribution member which is an example of a game device. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a variable ball entrance member, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above the left in the front direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a variable ball entrance member, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above the left in the front direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the holding means, which is an example of the game device, when viewed from diagonally above left in the rear direction. It is an example of the front view which shows the appearance when the 1st effect member which is an example of a game apparatus is seen from the front. FIG. 91 (a) shows the initial state of the first effect member, and FIG. 91 (b) shows the moving state which is the state after the movement of the first effect member. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the holding means, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the holding means, which is an example of the game device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the appearance when the 2nd effect member which is an example of a game apparatus is seen from the diagonally upper right in the front direction. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the appearance when the 2nd effect member which is an example of a game apparatus is seen from the diagonally upper right in the front direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a sorting device, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a moving member of a sorting device, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally lower right in the front direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a sorting device, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a return ball prevention structure, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the forward direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a return ball prevention structure, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the forward direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable decorative member which is an example of a game device when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable decorative member which is an example of a game device when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable decorative member which is an example of a game device when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a movable decorative member which is an example of a game device when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a painted decorative member which is an example of a game device when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by a circle A. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of an internal sphere flow path, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above to the right in the forward direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a ball flow passage, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a mounting structure, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above left in the rear direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a ball entry device, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the forward direction. It is an example of the cross-sectional view of the ball entry device which is an example of a game device. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the appearance when the guide part which is an example of a game apparatus is seen from the diagonally upper left in the forward direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a third effect member, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a third effect member, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the fourth effect member, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the appearance when the 5th effect member which is an example of a game apparatus is seen from the diagonally upper left in the front direction. FIG. 116 is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by a circle B. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a decorative member, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a decorative member which is an example of a game device when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a decorative member, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a decorative member, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable body decorative member which is an example of a game device when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable body decorative member, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable body decorative member which is an example of a game device when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable body decorative member which is an example of a game device when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. This is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the sixth effect member, which is an example of the game device, when viewed from diagonally above the left in the rear direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance when the sixth effect member, which is an example of a game device, is viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance when the seventh effect member, which is an example of a game device, is viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the seventh effect member, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a protruding decorative member, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction.

As an example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described as examples.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is in the front direction, the back side of the pachinko game machine is in the rear direction, the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is in the left direction, and the pachinko game is played. The right side when the machine is viewed from the front is to the right, the upper side of the pachinko machine is upward, the lower side of the pachinko machine is downward, and the clockwise direction when the pachinko machine is viewed from the front is clockwise. , On the contrary, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

The first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine are both so-called one-type pachinko gaming machines called Digipachi. Of these, the first pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel. Further, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, and only one of them is variably displayed.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko machine called a one-kind two-kind mixer, which is a mixture of a so-called one-kind type gaming machine called a digital pachi and a two-kind type gaming machine called a wing mono. It is a gaming machine. The third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification also has the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but in this specification, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed in parallel. An example will be described in which only one of them is variably displayed without any problem. However, this does not mean to exclude the pachinko game machines of the 1st and 2nd kind mixers in which the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In addition, in this specification, when it is simply referred to as a "special symbol", it shall mean both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified.

Further, the "variable display" referred to in the present specification is a concept including both "variable display" in which a symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner and "stop display" in which a symbol is stopped and displayed. Yes, the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display". When the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter, also referred to as "derivative"), the result of the special symbol hit determination process (hereinafter, also referred to as "special symbol lottery") described later or the normal symbol hit determination The result of the process (hereinafter, also referred to as "ordinary symbol lottery") is confirmed. In addition, although the symbol appears to be stopped, the symbol may be displayed in a mode in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol or the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not determined (for example, a temporarily stopped mode). However, such an aspect is included in the above variation display. Even when the symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, since the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol or the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not fixed at this point, the symbol can be displayed in a variable manner again.

Further, in describing the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine in this specification, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special). The case of (design) will be described as an example. However, the number of special symbols may be one for the second pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine.

[1. First pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be described.

[1-1. Appearance composition]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a dish unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), and a payout unit. 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2), and the like are provided. Further, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right portion of the game board unit 10. Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the dish unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8 and the board unit 9 will be briefly described, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be described. Details will be described later. The above parentheses indicate a reference drawing for a configuration (not shown in FIG. 1).

(Outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the amusement park. A hinge (without a reference symbol) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end portion of the outer frame 2, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported by the hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

The outer frame 2 supports a large number of members such as the payout unit 8, the board unit 9, the display device 7, the game board unit 10, the glass door 4, and the dish unit 5, which will be described later, via the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the effect of the effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be enlarged. Therefore, by forming the outer frame 2 with, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to maintain high strength while increasing the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(Base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a payout unit 8 and a board unit 9 attached to the back surface side, and supports them.

The game board unit 10 is fitted on the surface side of the base door 3. Further, for example, on the front side of the left end portion of the base door 3, hinges (without reference numerals) are provided at the upper end portion, the middle portion below the substantially central portion in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion, respectively, and the upper end portion is provided. The glass door 4 is pivotally supported by the hinges of the middle portion and the middle portion, and the dish unit 5 is pivotally supported by the hinges of the middle portion and the lower end portion, respectively. By doing so, the glass door 4 and the dish unit 5 can be rotated forward integrally or individually with respect to the base door 3 about the hinge.

Further, a launching device 6 is fixedly attached to, for example, the lower right side of the surface side of the base door 3, and a speaker 32 (see FIG. 2) is fixedly attached to each of the left and right sides of the upper side, for example. There is. From the speaker 32, for example, voice effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, voice notifications, effect sounds such as error notification, and the like are output.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side of the base door 3 opposite to the hinge (that is, the right end portion). This locking device has a function of locking the base door 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 with respect to the base door 3.

(Glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member having an opening 41 formed therein. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear surface side. When the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) formed in the game board unit 10 and the protective glass 43 face each other. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually recognized from the front in a state where the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, and the game ball flowing down the game area 105 is prevented from jumping forward. be able to.

The protective glass 43 may be attached by attaching a plurality of (for example, two) pieces of glass with a gap between them, or a plurality of pieces of glass are unitized so as to have a gap between them. You may. Further, when it is unitized, for example, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of, for example, a transparent resin.

Further, below the glass door 4, an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player is provided in order to receive the provision of a game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). The operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by a game hall manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

Further, a speaker cover 45 arranged in front of the speaker 32 described above is provided on the upper portion of the glass door 4. Further, a large number of LED groups 46 used for light emission effect and the like are arranged on the peripheral edge of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, reference numeral 46 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for producing a light-emitting effect or performing a light-emitting effect in various variations, but is not limited to the LED as long as such a light-emitting effect can be performed, for example, a liquid crystal display, a lamp, or the like. May be.

(Plate unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unitized version of the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52. The dish unit 5 is a lower front portion of the base door 3 and is arranged below the glass door 4. As described above, the plate unit 5 is configured to be rotated with respect to the base door 3 so that the dish unit 5 can be opened and closed so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, a clerk at the amusement park or the like can clear the ball jam. The plate unit 5 does not necessarily have to be provided with the upper plate 51 and the lower plate 52, respectively, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper plate 51 is provided so that the game balls can be stored, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 51 are launched from the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper plate 51 is provided with a payout port 53, an effect button 54, and the like. The rented game balls and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 53 to the upper plate 51. The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of vibrating or protruding upward based on the result of a hit determination process of a special symbol. Further, the function of the operation unit 66 may also be used.

The lower plate 52 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 51. The lower plate 52 is provided with a payout outlet 55 communicating with the upper plate 51, and the game ball overflowing from the upper plate 51 is paid out from the payout outlet 55 to the lower plate 52.

An opening (without a reference symbol) that can be opened and closed by a player's operation is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 52. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower plate 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower plate 52. In addition, when the so-called each machine counting system is provided in each machine, not only the ball box is not required, but also the game balls counted by each machine counting system are stored, and the stored game balls are stored again. It can also be used for games.

(Launcher)
The launching device 6 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launcher 6 is located in the lower right front of the base door 3 and is located in the lower right of the dish unit 5. The launching device 6 includes a panel body 61, a driving device (not shown), and a launching handle 62.

The panel body 61 is provided so that the dish unit 5 and the launching device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 are integrally formed in appearance when the dish unit 5 is closed with respect to the base door 3.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 61. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 61, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). When the launch handle 62 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. When operating the firing handle 62, the larger the amount of clockwise rotation (operation amount), the stronger the firing strength of the game ball.

The game ball launched from the launching device 6 arranged at the lower right of the plate unit 5 rolls in an arc shape along the guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) via the launch rail (not shown) for the game. It is launched into region 105 (see FIG. 4 below). The position of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right of the dish unit 5, and may be the lower left of the dish unit 5. In this case, the launch rail is not required, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively used, and the versatility can be enhanced.

(Display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or the like, or one that projects an image using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, an identification symbol for effect (for example, a decorative symbol) is variably displayed to display the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, or the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is displayed. An effect image, an effect image during a big hit game state, a demo effect image, an effect image showing the pending status of variable display of a special symbol, and the like are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged so as to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 is attached to the base door 3. It may be attached.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided to display the above-mentioned various effect images, but a plurality of (for example, two) display devices are provided and the plurality of display devices are used for the effect. The image may be displayed.

(Payout unit)
The payout unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, and the like. A game ball is supplied to the ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). A game ball is supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is satisfied, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls among the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81 to, for example, the upper plate 51. Further, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(Board unit)
The board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3. Various control boards and the like are provided on the board unit 9.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub control on which the sub control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted. The board 92, the payout / launch control board 93 on which the payout / launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described later) for controlling the payout / launch of the game ball is mounted, and the power supply circuit 450 for supplying power (see the figure below). A power supply board or the like on which (see 6) is mounted is provided on the board unit 9.

In FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub control board 92, the payout / launch control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but all of these boards are housed in the board case. ing.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (a board in which one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs are provided on one board). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all or part of the display control circuit 304, the voice control circuit 305, the LED control circuit 306, and the accessory control circuit 307 (all of which are described later with reference to FIG. 6), which will be described later, are separate substrates. Therefore, the sub-control board 92 may be composed of a plurality of boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 110, and a substantially center of the game area 105. Center accessory 115, first starting port 120, general winning opening 122, passing gate unit 125, special electric accessory unit 130, second starting ports 140A, 140B, and ordinary electric combination It includes an object unit 145, a small hit unit 150, an LED unit 160, an out port 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged behind the game board unit 10. As described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
The game panel 100 is formed with an opening (without reference numeral) at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. Further, a guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 110 toward the game area 105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be partially provided to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. However, the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a part thereof may be transparent. ..

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference symbol). The game area 105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to the upper part of the game area 105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into the opening of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko gaming machine, of the gaming areas 105, the area on the left side of the center accessory 115 is referred to as the left side area 106, and the area on the right side of the center accessory 115 is referred to as the right side area 107. The definitions of the left side region and the right side region are the same for the second pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, which will be described later.

The game ball launched toward the game area 105 by the launching device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game ball flowing down the left side region 106 or the right side area 107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region 107.

In this specification, as an operation mode (striking method) of the launching handle 62, a striking method in which the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left side region 106 is referred to as "left striking", and the right side region 107 is flowed down. The method of firing a game ball is called "right-handed". In this way, it is possible for the player to hit the game ball toward the left side area 106 or the right side area 107.

Further, the center accessory 115 is formed with a warp inlet 117 on the outer peripheral edge on the left side, which allows a game ball flowing down the left side region 106 to enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 is configured to be able to be guided to the stage 118 formed in the center accessory 115. The stage 118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in the lower front part of the display area of the display device 7. The stage 118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 117 but has not entered the chance entrance 119. The mouth 120 is designed to win (pass).

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that the left-handed game ball can win a prize (the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins the first starting port 120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later). The right-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) Random values for jackpot judgment, symbol random values of the first special symbol, random values for reach judgment of the first special symbol, and various random values such as random values for effect selection of the first special symbol) are extracted and extracted. A predetermined number (for example, up to 4) of various data are stored. When the start condition is satisfied, the various stored data are subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the first starting port 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is referred to as the starting winning of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, the random value for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol, the first (1) The symbol random value of the special symbol, the reach determination random value of the first special symbol, and various random values such as the effect selection random value of the first special symbol) are referred to as the start information of the first special symbol. Further, storing the starting information of the first special symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is referred to as holding, and the holding starting information of the first special symbol is also referred to as "holding ball of the first special symbol". The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General winning opening)
A plurality of general winning openings 122 are arranged in the lower left of the game area 105, and are arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). .. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 122 is played. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 122 is replaced with the above general winning opening 122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 125 is arranged in the right side region 107, and is configured so that the right-handed game ball can almost pass through the passing gate 126 and the passing gate switch for detecting the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 126. It is a unit body integrated with 127 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126, various data related to the normal symbol (for example, a random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) is extracted, and the extracted various data are predetermined. Up to a number (for example, up to 4) is stored. The various stored data are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 127 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate unit 125, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left side region 106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 107.

Further, the passing gate 126 may be made to function as an opportunity to operate the accessory continuous operation device. That is, the transition condition from the non-big hit gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) to the big hit gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operating device operate, but the stop display mode indicating that the jackpot is a big hit. When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 126, that is, the detection of the game ball by the passing gate switch 127 (see FIG. 6 described later) causes the accessory continuous operating device to operate. It may be activated to shift to the jackpot game state.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 is referred to as a start passage, and various data related to the ordinary symbol extracted by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (for example, a random value for hit determination of the ordinary symbol). Etc.) is called the start information of the ordinary symbol. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is referred to as holding, and the holding starting information of the normal symbol is also referred to as "holding ball of the normal symbol".

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 includes a jackpot jackpot 131 and a jackpot jackpot count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 below) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the jackpot jackpot 131. , It is a unit body that integrates the special electric accessory 133. The special electric accessory unit 130 is located at a substantially lower right portion in the game area 105 and below the passing gate unit 125.

The jackpot jack 131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot jackpot 131, a jackpot jackpot that allows a left-handed game ball to win may be placed, or a center accessory 115. A big hit opening for a big hit may be arranged at the upper part of the game ball.

Further, the big hit opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when controlled to the big hit game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. It is a winning opening to be done. When the jackpot jackpot count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects that a game ball has been won in the jackpot jackpot 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the big winning opening 131 for big hits is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) for operating the special electric shutter 134. The special electric accessory 133, that is, the shutter 134 for special electric power, is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (passed) through the big hit opening 131, and a game ball is won (passed) through the big hit opening 131. ) Is impossible or difficult to close, and the state can be transitioned to. The state transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 131 for big hits is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the jackpot prize opening 131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is in a gaming state.

(2nd starting port)
In this embodiment, the second starting port 140A and the second starting port 140B are arranged in the game area 105 as the second starting port, and both of these second starting ports 140A and 140B are right-handed. A game ball can be won (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the second starting port 140A and / and the second starting port 140B.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141A (see FIG. 6 described later). Further, when the game ball wins the second starting port 140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 141B (see FIG. 6 described later). Regardless of which of the second starting ports 140A and 140B the game ball wins, it triggers the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is detected by the second starting port switches 141A and 141B (see FIG. 6 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted and extracted. The generated start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, there are two flow paths 107a and 107b on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball, which is hit right but does not win the big hit opening 131. Is formed. The game ball that has been hit to the right and has flowed further toward the downstream side without winning a prize in the jackpot jack 131 is placed in the upper flow path 107a or the lower flow path 107b by, for example, the branch nail 108 shown in FIG. It is sorted.

The second starting port 140A is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win a prize, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a can win a prize. However, it is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a win the second starting port 140A, for example, it is a configuration in which winning the second starting port 140A can hardly be expected. Alternatively, the game ball flowing down the upper flow path 107a may be configured to win a prize with a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth). The game ball that has flowed down the upper flow path 107a but has not won the second starting port 140A is configured to be discharged to the outside of the machine from the out port 178.

The second starting port 140B is arranged so that the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 107b can win a prize, and the details thereof will be described later in the description of the ordinary electric accessory unit 145.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 145 is arranged on the lower flow path 107b side, and when a game ball wins (passes), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning opening to the winning opening. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects the winning of a game ball and an ordinary electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 141B. However, it is not essential that the winning opening is the second starting opening 140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the winning opening.

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes a general electric shutter 147 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a general electric solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) for operating the general electric shutter 147. The ordinary electric accessory 146, that is, the shutter 147 for general electric power, can win (pass) the game ball to the second starting port 140B or is easily opened, and cannot win the game ball to the second starting port 140B. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. Instead of the above-mentioned general electric shutter 147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member composed of, for example, a pair of blade members, which is a so-called electric tulip, may be adopted. Further, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Small hit unit)
The small hit unit 150 has a small hit large winning opening 151 and a small hit large winning opening count switch 152 for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the small hit large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 6 described later). It is a unit body in which a small hit shutter 153 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction and a small hit solenoid 154 capable of operating the small hit shutter 153 are integrated.

By advancing and retreating the small hit shutter 153 in the front-rear direction, the game ball can be won (passed) into the small hit large winning opening 151 or is easily opened, and the game to the small hit large winning opening 151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a ball.

If a game ball wins when the small hit large winning opening 151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small hit large winning opening count switch 152 (see FIG. 6 described later). When a game ball is detected by the small hit large winning opening count switch 152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the small hit large winning opening 151 is not limited to 10.

Further, the small hit unit 150 is a downward flow path 107b and is arranged on the downstream side of the ordinary electric accessory unit 145. Therefore, when the second starting port 140B is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146, even if the small hit large winning opening 151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the lower flow path 107b is small. Since the second starting opening 140B provided on the upstream side is won before reaching the winning large winning opening 151, it becomes difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning large winning opening 151.

In this embodiment, the big hit opening 131 and the small hit big winning opening 151 are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening opened when the big hit game control process is executed and the big winning opening are open. The large winning opening that is opened when the small hit game control process is executed may be the same large winning opening.

(Out mouth)
The out port 178 is any of various winning openings (for example, first starting opening 120, second starting opening 140A, 140B, big hit opening opening 131, general winning opening 122, etc.) fired toward the game area 105. This is for discharging the game balls that did not win the prize to the outside of the machine. The out port 178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 122 or between the ordinary electric accessory unit 145 and the small hit unit 150, and the game is played. The game ball flowing down the area 105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100 as described above. This back unit includes a production accessory group 58 such as a movable accessory controlled by a sub control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later). The effect group 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7. The effect accessory component members constituting at least one or more of the effect accessory group 58 function as the effect accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is the lower right portion of the game board unit 10 and is arranged outside the game area 105 (see FIGS. 4 and 5). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display unit 161, a normal symbol hold display unit 162, a first special symbol display unit 163, a second special symbol display unit 164, and a first special symbol hold display. A unit 165 and a second special symbol hold display unit 166 are provided.

(Normal symbol display)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, and includes the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the normal symbol") is satisfied, the variable display of the normal symbol in which the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b are alternately turned on and off is started. NS. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol hit, the combination of turning on / off the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b is a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned on and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned off. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is lost, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b showing the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 146 is operated, the shutter 147 for general electric power is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140B is reached. It becomes easy to win (pass) the game ball.

(Holding display for ordinary symbols)
When the variable display of the normal symbol is held, the hold display unit 162 for the normal symbol displays the number of the holdable variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the number of hold of the normal symbol"). Therefore, it is provided with hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for ordinary symbols. The above-mentioned "variable display of the normal symbol is suspended" means that various data (for example, a random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) related to the normal symbol when the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 is detected is detected. It refers to the state from the extraction until the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. The start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied when at least all of the conditions that the normal symbol is not in the variable display and that the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended are satisfied.

The hold display unit 162 for a normal symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 1, the hold display LED 162a for the normal symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 162b for the normal symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 2, both the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol are lit. Further, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 3, the hold display LED 162a for the normal symbol blinks and the hold display LED 162b for the normal symbol lights up. Further, when the number of hold of the normal symbol is 4, both the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 162a and 162b for the normal symbol indicating the number of hold of the normal symbol is not limited to this.

(Special symbol display)
The special symbol display unit displays the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, and includes a first special symbol display unit 163 and a second special symbol display unit 164. The first special symbol display unit 163 includes, for example, a first special symbol display LED group 163a composed of eight LEDs. Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group 164a composed of, for example, eight LEDs.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the first special symbol") is satisfied, the first special symbol display LED group 163a repeatedly turns on and off alternately or mutually. The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol display LED group 163a (for example, eight LEDs) constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 is specific. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting condition of the second special symbol") is satisfied, the second special symbol display LED group 164a repeatedly turns on and off alternately or mutually. The variable display of the second special symbol is started. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol display LED group 164a (for example, eight LEDs) constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 is specific. It becomes a stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display unit 164 is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition to the jackpot game state is determined.

(Hold display for special symbols)
When the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, the reserved display unit for the special symbol displays the number of variable displays of the reserved special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the number of reserved special symbols"). The first special symbol hold display unit 165 and the second special symbol hold display unit 166 are provided.

The hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol displays the number of holds of the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is held, and the hold display LEDs 165a, 165b for the first special symbol. To be equipped. "The variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that various data (for example, the first special symbol) related to the first special symbol when the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected. Various disturbances such as a random value for jackpot determination, a symbol random value for the first special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, and a random value for effect selection used when determining a variation pattern of the first special symbol. It refers to the state from the extraction of (numerical value, etc.) to the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol. The starting conditions for the first special symbol will be described later.

The hold display unit 165 for the first special symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the first special symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the first special symbol is 1, the hold display LED 165a for the first special symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 165b for the first special symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is two, both the holding display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. When the number of hold of the first special symbol is 3, the hold display LED 165a for the first special symbol blinks and the hold display LED 165b for the first special symbol lights up. Further, when the number of hold of the first special symbol is 4, both the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol indicating the number of hold of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

The second special symbol hold display unit 166 displays the number of holds of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is held, and the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a, 166b. To be equipped. "The variable display of the second special symbol is suspended" means that various data (for example, the second) related to the second special symbol when the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is detected. Random value for jackpot judgment of special symbol, symbol random value for second special symbol, random value for reach judgment of second special symbol, random value for effect selection used when determining fluctuation pattern of second special symbol, etc. It refers to the state from the extraction of various random values, etc.) to the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol. The starting conditions for the second special symbol will be described later.

The hold display unit 166 for the second special symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the second special symbol by the combination of turning on / off the hold display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol. For example, when the number of hold of the second special symbol is 1, the hold display LED 166a for the second special symbol is turned on and the hold display LED 166b for the second special symbol is turned off. Further, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is two, both the holding display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol are lit. When the number of hold of the second special symbol is 3, the hold display LED 166a for the second special symbol blinks and the hold display LED 166b for the second special symbol lights up. Further, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 4, both of the holding display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the hold display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol indicating the number of hold of the second special symbol is not limited to this.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 300 that controls the production according to the progress of the game, and payout / launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, a process executed when the power is turned on, a process related to a game operation, and the like, and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (read / write memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main ROM 202, the main RAM 203, the initial reset circuit 204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 201. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 200 has an I / O port 205 connected so as to be able to communicate with various devices and the like, a command output port 206 connected so as to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 300, and the like. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the main control circuit 200 includes the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 161, ordinary symbol hold display unit 162, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, and first special symbol hold display unit 165. , The second special symbol hold display unit 166, the general electric solenoid 148, the special electric solenoid 135, the small hit solenoid 154, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 170, the error notification monitor 172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data, setting values described later, and the like under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 172. Further, in the error notification monitor 172, in addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine having a setting function described later, a setting changing code indicating that the setting changing process is in progress and a setting confirmation process are being performed. It is also possible to display a code or the like during setting confirmation indicating. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 200 includes a first start port switch 121, a second start port switch 141A, 141B, a passing gate switch 127, a big hit big prize opening count switch 132, a general winning opening switch 123, and a small hit big prize. The mouth count switch 152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, the detection signal is output to the main control circuit 200 via the I / O port 205.

Further, the main control circuit 200 is used when data is transmitted to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 186 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The administrator of the game hall uses the external terminal board 184, the setting key 174 that is operated when changing or confirming the set value if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 203. A backup clear switch 176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation of is connected. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing the set value described later, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the game hall cannot easily touch the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 of the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 174 and / and backs up. Those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 176 are also included.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / launch control circuit 400 and the power supply circuit 450. The configuration may be as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a voice control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, a command input port 308, and the like. The sub control circuit 300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game production of the first pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and image data. Is provided with a D / A converter or the like that converts the data as an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing the decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 32. The voice control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to a voice generation command from the sub CPU 301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory group 58 for production). The accessory control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each accessory, an accessory data ROM in which an operation pattern is stored, and the like.

Further, the accessory control circuit 307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the mechanical operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The payout / launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout / launch control circuit 400 launches a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls and game balls. A launching device 6 capable of enabling the ball, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82, and controls the payout device 82 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving the ball lending and a lending / returning button (both not shown) for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which the cash data is stored. For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout / launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 400 applies electric power to the launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount) based on the rotation operation of the launch handle 62 in the clockwise direction. It supplies and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout / emission control circuit 400, and the like.

A power switch 95 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout / launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, the game flow of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko machine. The game flow shown in FIG. 7 is not a control flow but a flow that can be grasped by appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, when a game ball is launched by a user operation of a player or the like and the game ball wins a prize in various winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 120 or the like), the gaming ball The payout control process is performed. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process of a special symbol is executed based on a winning of a game ball to the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B, and whether or not to shift to a big hit game state is determined. .. Further, in the ordinary symbol game, for example, a hit determination process of the ordinary symbol is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126, and the ordinary electric accessory 146 is operated to win a winning opening (second in this embodiment). This is a game in which it is determined whether or not the starting port 140B) is opened. In this specification, the "special symbol game" may be referred to as a "game", but the "game" is a term used in a broad concept, and for example, an operation unit such as a normal symbol game or an effect button 54 ( For example, a game for production using (see FIG. 1) is also included in the “game”.

Further, in this specification, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display and the final display (derivation) of the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (more specifically, the special symbol is confirmed). (Until the passage of time) is regarded as one special symbol game. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is derived and then controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the game is regarded as one special symbol game until the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. do.

When the stop display mode indicating the big hit in the special symbol game is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, it is controlled to the big hit game state. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the jackpot jackpot 131 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30,000 msec) by the operation of the special electric accessory 133, and there is a possibility of winning the jackpot jackpot 131. Relatively enhanced.

Further, when the stop display mode indicating the normal symbol hit is derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 in the normal symbol game, the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) is opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146. It becomes an open state, and for example, the possibility of winning a prize in the second starting port 140B is relatively increased.

The game that can be executed in the pachinko game is not limited to the special symbol game and the ordinary symbol game, and a new game different from these may be able to be executed.

The outline of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, in the special symbol game, the special symbol start winning process performed mainly when the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A and 140B are won (passed), and the special symbol starting winning process and This includes special symbol control processing, etc., which is performed based on the establishment of the special symbol start condition.

When a game ball is won in the first starting port 120 or the second starting ports 140A and 140B, a special symbol start winning prize process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, jackpot determination random value, symbol random value, reach determination) from various counters for the special symbol (for example, a jackpot determination counter, a symbol determination counter, etc.) Random values for, and various random values such as random values for effect selection) are extracted (acquired), respectively. Each extracted random number value is reserved as start information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even while the special symbol control process is being executed.

Further, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied. When the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the hit determination process of the special symbol for determining whether or not it is a "big hit" is performed by referring to the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter of the special symbol. After that, the stop symbol determination process for determining the stop symbol is performed. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter of the special symbol and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, if the probability change flag is on, the probability change control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process, when the probability variation flag is off, it is determined to be a "big hit" with a relatively low probability, and when the probability variation flag is on, it is determined to be a "big hit" with a relatively high probability. Is determined. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "big hit" is referred to as a "big hit probability".

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the probability change control. When the probability change flag is on, the game proceeds in the game state in which the probability change control is executed (for example, the high probability time saving game state or the high probability non-time saving game state in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is off, the game proceeds in a game state in which the probability change control is not executed (for example, a normal game state or a low probability time short game state).

Next, the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is referred to. (Variable display pattern) is determined. Then, the variable display control process of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the effect pattern determination process for determining the effect pattern is performed next. Then, based on the result of the effect pattern determination process, for example, a display effect such as a decorative pattern or a character effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a sound effect such as a sound or a sound effect output from the speaker 32, etc. The effect control process of is performed. The effect control process is performed by the sub CPU 301.

Then, the variable display control process and the effect control process of the special symbol are completed, and when it is a big hit, the big hit game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the big hit game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and the game state transition control process to the non-big hit game state is performed. In this case, the gaming state shifts according to the type of jackpot. For example, when both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to the big hit type, the state shifts to the probability change time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, that is, it is a loss, the special symbol game ends. Although not shown in FIG. 7, in the case of a small hit, a small hit game control process is performed.

Then, each time the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

If a game ball is won in the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B during the special symbol control process, the special symbol start winning process is executed. In addition, the start information of the special symbol extracted at the time of winning the game ball to the start ports 120, 140A, 140B (for example, the jackpot determination random value, the special symbol symbol random value, the reach determination random value, and the effect selection Various data such as various random values such as random values) are held until the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied.

Further, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the starting information of the first special symbol and the starting information of the second special symbol can hold up to a total of eight special symbol starting information. , The number of start information of special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the start information of the first special symbol may be held more than the start information of the second special symbol, or the start information of the second special symbol may be held more than the start information of the first special symbol. It may be.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 7, when the game ball is awarded (passed) to the starting ports 120, 140A, 140B between the time when the special symbol is started and the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Based on the extracted start information, a look-ahead judgment is performed to determine a win (whether or not a "big hit" is won) or a fluctuation pattern prior to the hit judgment process of a special symbol, and a predetermined effect is performed based on the result of this look-ahead judgment. It may be provided with a directing function. The pre-reading determination may be performed before the start information extracted by winning the game ball to the start ports 120, 140A, 140B is reserved, or may be performed after the start information is reserved.

[1-3-2. Ordinary design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol start passing process performed mainly when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and the normal symbol start condition are satisfied. It includes ordinary symbol control processing, etc., which are performed based on the above.

When the game ball has passed through the passing gate 126, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In this normal symbol start passing process, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, the random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) is extracted (acquired) from the hit determination counter for the normal symbol, and the extracted start information is reserved.

Further, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit judgment random value of the normal symbol extracted from the hit judgment counter for the normal symbol, and whether or not to set it as "normal symbol hit" is normal. The hit determination process of the symbol is executed, and then the variation pattern determination process is executed. In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the normal symbol hit determination process and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol, and controls the variable display of the normal symbol, and the effect of performing a predetermined effect. Execute control processing. The effect control process may not be executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect control process of the normal symbol are completed, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal hit symbol indicating "normal symbol hit" is derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 (see FIG. 6). do. When it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes the normal symbol hit game control process. In this game control process per normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) is activated, and the game is played to the winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, for example, the second starting port 140B (see FIG. 4)). The ball can be won (passed) or easily opened. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol hit game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In the gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) in which the time saving control is not executed, the probability that the stop display mode indicating the normal hit is derived may be set to 0. The time saving control is a special figure shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol as compared with the time when the time saving control is not executed, and a winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the first prize opening) by operating the ordinary electric accessory 146. 2 The control in which at least one of the electric support controls for increasing the frequency of opening the starting port 140B) is performed corresponds to this. This time saving control may be a control that performs both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, or may be a control that performs only one of the special figure shortening control and the electric support control.

Then, each time the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

If the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. Further, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, the random value for hit determination of the normal symbol) extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 is held until the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied.

The variable display of the normal symbol is started in the order in which it is held, and when the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the variable display of the start information held first among the start information of the reserved normal symbol is displayed. Run.

In addition, various random values (for example, a random value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, a symbol random value of the first special symbol, a random value for reach determination of the first special symbol, a random value for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, The extraction method of the symbol random value of the second special symbol, the reach determination random value of the second special symbol, the hit determination random value of the normal symbol, etc.) is within a predetermined range by executing the program by the main CPU 201. A soft random number method that generates a random number value within the width) may be used, or a hard random number method that extracts a random number value from a counter in a random number generator in which a random number is updated at a predetermined cycle may be used.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 12.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which neither probability variation control nor time reduction control is executed, a high probability time reduction game state in which both probability variation control and time reduction control are executed, and time reduction control in which probability variation control is executed. A high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state in which is not executed, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state in which probability variation control is not executed but time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 201 is in any of these gaming states. It is possible to advance the game in. However, the gaming state progressed by the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this, and progresses in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. It may not be done. For example, even if the game progresses in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the game does not proceed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed hitting is recommended in the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 301 executes a control for displaying the recommended striking method in, for example, a display area of the display device 7.

[1-4-1. Big hit probability for each set value]
FIG. 8 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximate) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 8, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a plurality of setting values such as setting 1 to setting 6 are used by using the above-mentioned setting key 174, backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6) and the like. It can be set to any one of the set values. In the case of such a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes the hit determination process of the special symbol based on the set set value.

Specifically, the jackpot probability in the game state in which the probability change flag is off (for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-short game state in this embodiment) in which the probability change control is not executed is determined by the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the second special. Regardless of which of the symbol hit determination processes is executed, for example, setting 1 is about 1/319, setting 2 is about 1/314, setting 3 is about 1/309, and setting 4 is about 1. It is 1/304, about 1/299 with setting 5, and about 1/294 with setting 6. Further, the jackpot probability in the game state in which the probability change flag for which the probability change control is executed is on (for example, the high probability time saving game state and the high probability non-time saving game state in this embodiment) is about 1/77 in setting 1, and setting 2 Is about 1/76, setting 3 is about 1/75, setting 4 is about 1/74, setting 5 is about 1/73, and setting 6 is about 1/72. Although the small hit probability is not shown in FIG. 8, it may be different depending on the set value, or it may be a common probability in the settings 1 to 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probabilities are different for all the set values, but the jackpot probability is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot probabilities common to the setting 1 and the setting 2 and common to the setting 3 and the setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of set values, such as the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability common to the setting 5 and the setting 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs according to the set value, the target different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which a game ball is controlled to a jackpot game state when a game ball wins in a specific winning opening, the winning probability in the specific winning opening may be different depending on a set value. It is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 9 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 9 shows the case of setting 1 shown in FIG. 8 as an example.

The hit determination table of the special symbol is a table referred to in the hit determination process of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot determination random acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 120 or the second start ports 140A and 140B. It is a table referred to when determining "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" by lottery based on numerical values. In this embodiment, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the first special symbol are only "big hit" and "loss". On the other hand, the lottery targets in the hit determination process of the second special symbol are "big hit", "small hit" and "loss". However, "small hit" may be included in the lottery target in the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

As described above, the jackpot determination random number value is a random number value used in the hit determination process of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process of the first special symbol, "big hit" or "loss" is determined based on the extracted random value for big hit determination. In the hit judgment table of the first special symbol, the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" and the corresponding big hit judgment value data are displayed for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag. The relationship between the above and the range (width) of the random value for jackpot determination determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data are defined.

In the present specification, when the value of the probability change flag is "0", the probability change flag is off, and when the value of the probability change flag is "1", the probability change flag is on.

Further, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, it is determined as "big hit", "small hit" or "miss" based on the extracted random value for big hit determination. In the hit judgment table of the second special symbol, the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "big hit" and the corresponding big hit judgment value data are displayed for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag. Relationship, the relationship between the range (width) of the big hit judgment random value determined as "small hit" and the corresponding small hit judgment value data, and the large hit judgment random value determined as "miss" The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding loss judgment value data is defined.

In this embodiment, if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 204, it is determined as "big hit" and the winning determination is made. The value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". If the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random value is neither 0 to 204, it is determined to be "missing" and the determination value data is "missing". It is determined as "judgment value data".

If the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 850, it is determined as "big hit" and the determination value data is "big hit". It is determined as "big hit judgment value data". If the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is neither 0 to 850, it is determined as "missing" and the determination value data is "missing". It is determined as "judgment value data".

Similarly, if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 204, it is determined as "big hit" and the determination value data is It is determined as "big hit judgment value data". If the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted large hit determination random number value is any of 205 to 22049, it is determined as "small hit" and the determination value data is It is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Further, if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is neither 0 to 22049, it is determined as "missing", and the determination value data is "missing". It is determined as "judgment value data".

If the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is any of 0 to 850, it is determined as "big hit" and the determination value data is "big hit". It is determined as "big hit judgment value data". If the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted large hit determination random number value is any of 851 to 22695, it is determined as "small hit" and the determination value data is It is determined as "small hit judgment value data". Further, if the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random number value is neither 0 to 22695, it is determined as "missing", and the determination value data is "missing". It is determined as "judgment value data".

[1-4-3. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins in the first start port 120 or the second start ports 140A and 140B and the above-mentioned winning judgment value data. It is a table that is referred to when the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol specification command" are selected. The "hit selection symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, and the "symbol specification command" is This command is used to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 10, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are as follows. Be selected. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, "z0" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 2 to 9, "z1" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, "z2" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, "z3" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the hit selection symbol command is selected regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Instead, "zA3" is selected as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 29, "z4" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 30 to 59, "z5" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 60 to 99, "z6" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, "z7" is used as the hit selection symbol command regardless of whether the symbol random value of the special symbol is 0 to 99. Is selected, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol specification command.

When the small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 executes the small hit game control process. In the small hit game control process, for example, the small hit shutter 153 (see FIG. 6) is activated to allow or easily open the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4). The prize ball can be paid out by executing the control to be in the state.

If the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "missing", the hit selection symbol command is not selected regardless of whether the symbol random value of the special symbol is 0 to 99, and the symbol is specified. "ZA7" is selected as the command.

In this embodiment, the winning judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot judgment with reference to the hit judgment table of the special symbol (see FIG. 9), and then the special symbol judgment table (FIG. 9). 10) is referred to, and a so-called two-stage lottery is performed in which a hit selection symbol command and a symbol designation command are determined based on a symbol random value of a special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random value for jackpot determination and the symbol random value of the special symbol, a so-called one-step lottery such as determining the winning of the special symbol, the hit selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be performed. good.

[1-4-4. Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 11 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table is the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the probability variation flag, the number of probability variation, and the value of the time reduction flag according to the hit selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol. , And when determining the type of jackpot, such as the number of time reductions.

In the present specification, as in the case of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag is off when the value of the time saving flag is "0", and the time saving flag is turned on when the value of the time saving flag is "1".

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", the big hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", and the time reduction flag is off. When the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", the time reduction flag is on, and the time reduction number is "10000". When the hit selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "4", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", the time reduction flag is on, and the time reduction number is "10000". Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the probability variation flag is off, the time reduction flag is on, and the number of time reductions is "50".

If the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "big hit", the big hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", and the time reduction flag is off. When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10", the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number is "10000", the time reduction flag is on, and the time reduction number is "10000". Further, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z6", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the probability variation flag is off, the time reduction flag is on, and the number of time reductions is "50".

However, the type of jackpot shown in FIG. 11 is an example, and is not limited to this. When the value of the probability variation flag is determined to be "0", the probability variation number is not determined, but the probability variation number may be set to "0" in the sense that the probability variation control is not executed.

The probability variation number "10000" is continuously executed until the probability variation control is determined to be a jackpot (that is, the next jackpot) in the hit determination process of the special symbol executed in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. It is the purpose of being able to do it.

[1-4-5. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 12 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine, which is (A) a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start, and (B) a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start. Is. It should be noted that the column of "Production content" in FIG. 12 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120, and the second special when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting ports 140A and 140B. Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol.

In the normal gaming state in which left-handed hitting is recommended, for example, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 12 (A).

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which right-handed striking is recommended, that is, in the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, or the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, for example, the variation of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the pattern table.

As shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the variation pattern of the special symbol includes the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (winning), the random value for reach determination, and the effect selection. Determined based on random numbers. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination may be made in place of or in addition to any of the above values based on other values or the like.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

When the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, it is compared with the case where the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start. , The expected value of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time is large. In particular, when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start, the second special symbol is variable over an extremely long time, for example, approximately 600,000 msec (for example, long variation A to C). The display is done. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for an extremely short time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, ultrafast fluctuation). ..

The main CPU 201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 12, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol to be determined may be different for each set value, for example, by changing the range of the random value for effect selection.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start, and for example, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state or the low. In the probability short game state, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, but the present invention is not limited to this.

[1-5. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 39.
[1-5-1. Main control main processing]
Next, the main process (main control main process) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. 13 to 16 are flowcharts showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the power interruption signal is at the High level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

When it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at the High level (when the determination in S11 is NO), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process in S11.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at the High level (when the determination in S11 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 (S12). In this process, the backup clear switch 176 on / off state and the setting key 174 on / off state are saved. That is, the on / off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. In this process, the game permission flag is set to off. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the start waiting on the sub control circuit 300 side is performed. The start-up waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 1200.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S14.

While waiting for activation on the sub-control circuit 300 side, the main CPU 201 may, for example, check the interrupt request signal, output the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initialize various sensors at predetermined timings. The output processing of the conversion signal may be performed.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure before startup (previous time) was a normal power failure. In this process, it is determined whether the power failure is normal or abnormal based on the value stored in the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203.

When it is determined in S14 that the power failure is not normal (NO in S14), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S14 that the power is normally cut off (when the determination in S14 is YES), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then works. The checksum value of the area is collated (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the collation result is abnormal.

When it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, that is, normal (when the determination in S17 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22. The processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S17 that the collation result is abnormal, that is, not normal (when the determination in S17 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, a NO determination is made, and if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, or either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176. If either one is off, a YES judgment is made.

When it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (when the determination in S18 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S21. The processing of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (when the determination in S18 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 sets the security signal of the external terminal to ON. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs an error display process on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). In this process, data for error display is set in the output port of the I / O port 205 where the signal is output to the performance display monitor 170. As a result, the predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 lights up, and an error display is performed. The main CPU 201 enters an endless loop after executing the process of S20.

In this way, if the previous power failure was not a normal power failure, or if the checksum value collation result of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 was not normal, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch Until it is determined that both 176 are on, the game cannot be executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

Next, the processing of S21 will be described. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating that the setting has been changed in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal startup, and the value indicating that the setting is changed is stored again. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203 (S22). After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state determination process. In this process, the current start state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the start control flag stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at startup. In this process, a process of clearing a work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like (for example, construction of a work area and address setting) is performed. Note that this process is performed in common at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs a startup initial setting process. In this process, initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear). The details of the initial setting process at startup will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt prohibition process. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs a power failure process. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S28. The details of the power interruption process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S28, the main CPU 201 updates the initial value random number. In this process, the initial value random number of various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a big hit of a special symbol) is updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

When it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (NO in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process after S26.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs the performance display monitor aggregation calculation process. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Further, this process is performed using an area (outside the area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs a restore process of the register saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

When it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to the process of S26 and performs the process after S26.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (when the determination in S35 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S37.

In this embodiment, in the main control main process, for example, an interrupt prohibition section of 6 msec (process section of S26 to S35) is performed before execution of various processes related to game control (for example, processes of S37 to S44) described later. Is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle), for example. In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt prohibition section is set to three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 updates the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs a main control command transmission / reception process. In this process, a command transmission / reception process for payout control is mainly performed. After executing the process of S38, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol control process. In this process, a process related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process, a process related to a normal symbol game is performed. The details of this ordinary symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs a game operation display unit control process. In this process, display data to be output to each display unit of the LED unit 160 (for example, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, etc.) is set. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, external terminal board pulse signal control process, output data setting process, test firing test signal generation process, and the like are performed. The test firing test signal generation process is performed using an area (outside the area) different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs port output processing. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs a state monitoring process. In this process, launch position determination processing, game abnormality detection determination processing, payout abnormality detection determination processing, and the like are performed. In the launch position determination process, if there is a change in the launch position (for example, right-handed or left-handed), the launch position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, the game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, the payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process after S26.

[1-5-2. Initial setting process at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the initial setting process at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading the start control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure.

When it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. When the second normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup state flag is not a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clear (when S54 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S56.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating setting change or setting confirmation (when the determination in S54 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the setting operation command. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. When the first normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

[1-5-3. Power failure processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the power interruption process performed in S27 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of power interruption processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

When it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (when the determination in S61 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the power interruption process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is ON (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs a checksum value calculation process. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in the corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203, respectively. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the XINT detection flag. Then, after executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs the RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset waiting process until the power is cut off.

[1-5-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, the special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 and 20 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol control process performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 19, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S71. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display (special symbol game) of each special symbol. After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S72.

Although not shown, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area or the like of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71 when executing the special symbol control process. ..

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is held for a certain period of time. If it is "0" over the above, the demo display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol is performed. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, if the demo display command is a demo display command of the main special symbol, the sub CPU 301 performs a demo display effect. The main special symbol will be described in the sub control process described later.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the timing to start the variable display based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S71.

When it is determined in S72 that the second special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S72 is NO), that is, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, the main CPU 201 processes. To S73. For example, NO is determined in S72 during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S72 that the second special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S72 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

In S73, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S73, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S74, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the timing to start the variable display based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S74.

When it is determined in S75 that the timing of the variable display start is not the first special symbol (when the determination in S75 is NO), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the main CPU 201 processes. To S76. For example, NO is determined in S75 during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S75 that the first special symbol is the timing for starting the variable display (when the determination in S75 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S77.

In S76, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S76, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S77.

In S77, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S77, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S78.

In S78, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the timing to start the variable display based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S77.

When it is determined in S78 that the second special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO in S78), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S80.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S78 that the second special symbol is the timing to start the variable display (when the determination in S78 is YES), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is executed and the variable display can be started. If, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S79, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S80, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the timing to start the variable display based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S80.

When it is determined in S81 that the first special symbol is not the timing for starting the variable display (NO determination in S81), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and performs the process as the main control main process (FIGS. 13 to 13 to 13). (See FIG. 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S81 that the first special symbol is the timing to start the variable display (when the determination in S81 is YES), that is, no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and the variable display can be started. If, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S71 to S82) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when any process related to the second special symbol is executed, when any process related to the first special symbol is executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. When no processing is executed and variable display can be started, and when no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started, the special symbol management processing described later is performed in the order of priority. Is being executed.

[1-5-5. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S73, S76, S79, and S82 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

For example, when the special symbol management process is called and executed in S73 or S79 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol is the processing target, and the special symbol management process is S76 or S76 during the special symbol control process. When it is called and executed in S82, the first special symbol is processed.

The numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 20 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S91).

When it is determined in S91 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S91 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S91 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S91 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93. The main CPU 201 performs the processing after S93 based on the control state number read in the processing of S92.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S93 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S94.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S94 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. The process of S95 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. The process of S96 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. This process of S97 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of the large winning opening opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S98 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

After completing the processes of S93 to S98, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). The main CPU 201 returns the process to S74 when the special symbol management process is called in S73 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S77 when it is called in S76, and is called in S79. If so, the process is returned to S80, and if it is called in S82, the special symbol control process is also terminated.

[1-5-6. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S93 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display start processing is called in S93 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start processing is called in S93 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 21, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S101).

When it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S101 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S101 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S102, even if S101 is a YES determination (that is, even if the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is ON (S102 is a NO determination). If), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

When it is determined in S102 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (when the determination in S102 is NO), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol variable display. End the start process. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S102 that the special symbol pause flag is off (when the determination in S102 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S103, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S104.

In S104, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination of the special symbol is performed by referring to the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 6) and using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the hit is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. In the hit determination process of the special symbol, first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit, a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit is performed, and this process is performed. If it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined that it is a loss. After executing the process of S104, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S105.

In S105, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S104) of the special symbol (for example, big hit, small hit or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "hit selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 10) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, it is not necessary to determine the stop symbol when the hit determination process of the special symbol is loss. After executing the process of S105, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S106.

In S106, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of the jackpot when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a jackpot. In this process, the jackpot type is determined according to the "hit time selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S105) with reference to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots, but there may be only one type of jackpot. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of big hits, a plurality of types of other hits (for example, small hits) may be provided, or a plurality of types of loss may be provided. good. After executing the process of S106, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S107.

In S107, the main CPU 201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 12) is referred to, and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S104) of the special symbol, the reach determination random value or / and the effect selection random value, etc. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined accordingly. In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state in which left-handed strike is recommended, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 12A), and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined on the right. In the gaming state where hitting is recommended (for example, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), a variable pattern table of special symbols for high start (see FIG. 12 (B)) is displayed. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to it. After executing the process of S107, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S108.

In S108, the main CPU 201 performs the variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S107) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 12). After executing the process of S108, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S109.

In S109, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of the special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 20). S94) will be performed. After executing the process of S109, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S110.

In S110, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are updated. After executing the process of S110, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S111.

In S111, the main CPU 201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S111, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and prohibits interrupts from the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S111) and special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S112)). It is preferable to do it within the section.

[1-5-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S94 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. 22 and 23 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end processing is called in S94 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end processing is called in S94 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. Further, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol of the person to be processed is simply referred to as "special symbol", and the special symbol of the person not to be processed is referred to as "the other special symbol".

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S121).

When it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S121 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S121 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S122, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded in S122.

When it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (when the determination in S123 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S123 that the special symbol pause flag is off (when the determination in S123 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S95 in FIG. 20) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. See) will be done. After executing the process of S124, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S125, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is fixed (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions. You may manage the number. After executing the process of S126, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S127.

In S127, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a small hit.

In S127, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is not a small hit (when S127 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S129.

On the other hand, in S127, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S104 in FIG. 21) is determined to be a small hit (when the determination in S127 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S128.

In S128, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started or stopped during the execution of the small hit game control process. After executing the process of S128, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S129.

In S129, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S104 of FIG. 21) is a big hit.

In S129, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is not a big hit (when S129 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and processes it. Is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, in S129, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S104 in FIG. 21) is determined to be a big hit (when the determination in S129 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S130.

In S130, the main CPU 201 sets the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started during the execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S130, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S131.

In S131, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is in variable display (S131).

When it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is not in the variable display (when the determination in S131 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is in the variable display (when the determination in S131 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the test firing test signal is output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to loss. After executing the process of S133, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S134.

In S134, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a loss and sets it. By performing this process, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be processed (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a big hit, the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the other special symbol is hit. Even if the result of the determination process is a big hit, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped due to loss. After executing the process of S134, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S135.

In S135, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S135, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S136.

In S136, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating a big hit, the other special symbol stops in the stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process of S136, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S137.

In S137, the main CPU 201 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S137, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S138.

In S138, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S138, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S139.

In S139, the main CPU 201 performs the transmission reservation process of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. NS. After executing the process of S139, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

As described above, in the special symbol variable display end processing of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the hit determination processing of this special symbol (see S104 of FIG. 21). If the result of is a big hit and the other special symbol is in the variable display, the process of forcibly losing the variable display of the other special symbol is performed.

[1-5-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S95 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. 24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When this special symbol game determination process is called in S95 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S95 during the special symbol management process for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S141).

When it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S141 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 20). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S142, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S142 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S143. On the other hand, in S142, when it is determined that the special symbol which is a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S142 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S145.

In S143, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a small hit.

In S143, when it is determined that the special symbol that is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a loss (when S143 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S144.

In S144, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, in S143, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is the stop display mode indicating the small hit (when the determination in S143 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 201 performs a big hit game control process or a small hit game control process start setting process. In this process, a signal output to, for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown) is generated and updated via the external terminal plate 184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After performing the processing of S145, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S146. The signal output to, for example, the hall computer 186 or the island computer via the external terminal plate 184 will be described later.

In S146, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 is subjected to, for example, a process (S147) of setting an upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening for opening (for example, the large winning opening 131 for big hits or the large winning opening 151 for small hits) is opened (S147), and the external terminal plate 184. Big hit signal set processing (S148), special symbol control state number set to "3" (S149), game state specification parameter setting processing (S150), and big hit start display command transmission reservation processing (S151). ) Etc. are performed. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S149) and switching the control state number, after the completion of the special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (FIG. 20). (See S96) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S141 to S151) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[1-5-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S144 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 24 and 25) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol (S161). When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed in this way, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S161, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process (S163) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S163, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end processing and the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-10. Large prize opening preparatory process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S96 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When this large winning opening preparatory process is called in S96 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the large winning opening opening preparation process is called in S96 during the special symbol management process for processing the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S171).

When it is determined in S171 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S171 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S171 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S171 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 loads the large winning opening opening count counter value. The jackpot opening count counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state when the jackpot game control process is executed, and when the small hit game control process is executed. , A counter that counts the number of times the small hit game control process is executed corresponds to this. The count value of the large winning opening opening counter (the large winning opening opening counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S173.

In S173, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 131 for big hits or the large winning opening 151 for small hits) is opened is the upper limit value. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the jackpot jackpot 131 opened in the jackpot game state is opened, is, for example, 4 rounds or 4 rounds as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11). 10 rounds. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times the small hit large winning opening 151 is opened in the small hit game state is, for example, once.

When it is determined in S173 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S173 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S174.

In S174, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S174) and switching the control state number, the big hit end process (FIG. 20) is completed after the end of the big winning opening preparatory process. S98) will be performed. After executing the process of S174, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S175.

In S175, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S176). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S176, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20).

Returning to S173, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S173 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S177.

In S177, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened. After executing the process of S177, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S178.

In S178, the main CPU 201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the big hit opening 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected as the big winning opening for opening when the big hit game control process is executed, and for the small hit when the small hit game control process is executed. The grand prize opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is selected. After executing the process of S178, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S179.

In S179, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the big winning opening (the big winning opening 131 for the big hit, the big winning opening 151 for the small hit) is opened, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening, and the big winning opening winning The number of prize balls at the time is set. The number of times the big winning opening is opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the big hit game control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the small hit big winning opening 151 is opened when the small hit game control process is executed. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round or the small hit game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to control the number of rounds to be managed and the control to manage the number of times the large winning opening is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S179, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S180.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when the big hit game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1800 msec when the small hit game control process is executed. NS. The maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 when the big hit game control process is executed, and is set to a maximum of 5, for example, when the small hit game control process is executed. The number of prize balls at the time of winning a large winning opening is set to 10, for example, for both the large winning opening 131 for big hits and the large winning opening 151 for small hits. However, the values set in various setting processes related to the large winning opening are not limited to the above.

In S180, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, opening / closing control data generation processing of the large winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) is performed. After executing the process of S180, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S181.

In S181, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S181) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process (S181) (See S97 in FIG. 20) will be performed. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the large winning opening opening display command. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S183, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-11. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S97 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When this large winning opening opening control process is called in S97 during the special symbol management process for processing the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the large winning opening opening control process is called in S97 during the special symbol management process for processing the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S191).

When it is determined in S191 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S191 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S191 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S191 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) is the maximum winning number. In this process, the large winning opening winning counter that counts the number of winning balls to the large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening count switch 132 for big hits and the large winning opening count switch 152 for small hits (see FIG. 6)). Etc.), it is determined whether or not the value counted is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winnings. The large winning opening winning counter value counted by the large winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S192, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) is not the maximum winning number (when S192 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 Moves the process to S193.

On the other hand, in S192, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the large winning openings (large winning opening 131 for big hits, large winning opening 151 for small hits) is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when S192 is a YES determination). ), The main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S194.

In S193, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S179 in FIG. 27) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S193 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) has not passed (when S193 is NO judgment), the main CPU 201 is given a big winning. The mouth opening control process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S193 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (large winning opening 131 for big hit, large winning opening 151 for small hit) has elapsed (when S193 is YES determination), the main CPU 201 is determined. The processing is transferred to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 closes the big winning opening (big winning opening 131 for big hit, big winning opening 151 for small hit). After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S195) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the preparation for opening the large winning opening is made again. The process (see S96 in FIG. 20) will be performed. After executing the process of S195, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S197.

In S197, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S197, the main CPU 201 ends the large winning opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-12. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S98 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When this jackpot end processing is called in S98 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the jackpot end processing is called in S98 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S201).

When it is determined in S201 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S201 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S201 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S201 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S202.

In S202, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (for example, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.) are set or reset, and various counters (for example, probability variation counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, large winning opening opening count counter, large winning opening) are set. The process of setting or resetting the value of the winning counter, etc.) is performed. The special symbol pause flag is reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S202). After executing the process of S202, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 26 is performed. After executing the process of S203, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[1-5-13. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 30 are control state numbers of ordinary symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S211).

When it is determined in S211 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S211 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S211 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S212.

In S212, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol (S212). After executing the process of S212, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S213. The main CPU 201 performs the processing after S213 based on the control state number read in the processing of S212.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs the variable display start processing of the normal symbol. The process of S213 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs the variable display end processing of the normal symbol. The process of S214 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when terminating the variable display of the normal symbol. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game determination process. The process of S215 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game determination process, the determination process of the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, hitting or losing the normal symbol) is performed. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S216.

In S216, the main CPU 201 normally performs the electric accessory opening process. The process of S216 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 is performed in a predetermined manner. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S217.

In S217, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol hit termination process. The process of S217 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 finishes the normal symbol per-end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In this embodiment, a random number for hit determination of a normal symbol is generated in a range (width) of, for example, 0 to 255, and for example, 0 to 255 is used as the hit determination value data of the normal symbol. Since the normal symbol hit probability is determined by the number of normal symbol hit judgment value data with respect to the total random number of the normal symbol hit determination random number, for example, the normal symbol hit probability is 255/256 in this embodiment. The probability of hitting a normal symbol is the same or almost the same when the time saving control is executed and when the time saving control is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a relatively long time, for example 600 sec, in the game state where the time reduction control is not executed, whereas it is executed for a relatively short time, for example 1 sec, in the game state where the time reduction control is executed. Only executed. When the time saving control is executed in this way, the execution frequency of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the winning frequency of the game balls to the second starting ports 140A and 140B is increased.

[1-5-14. External masquerade interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the external masqueradable interrupt process executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when a power is cut off. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the external masqueradable interrupt process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S221). After executing the process of S221, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S222.

In S222, the main CPU 201 reads out the state of a predetermined input port of the I / O port 205. The above-mentioned predetermined input port is set with, for example, states such as a power failure detection line, a backup clear switch line, a sensor abnormality detection line, a radio wave sensor line, an open detection line, a magnetic sensor line, a vibration sensor line, and a solenoid monitoring sensor line. The input port to be used. After executing the process of S222, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S223.

In S223, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure is detected.

When it is determined in S223 that the power failure is not detected (NO in S223), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S225. On the other hand, when it is determined in S223 that the power failure is detected (when the determination in S223 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S224.

In S224, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that the power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S2224, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 201 performs a restoration process of the protection register saved in S221. After executing the process of S225, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external masqueradable interrupt process.

[1-5-15. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 with an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first saves the protection register (S231).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is off (S232). When it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, at the time of power failure detection) (when S232 is NO determination), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S246. On the other hand, when it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, when the power failure is not detected) (when the determination in S232 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I / O port 205 (S234), and shifts the process to S235.

In S235, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on, for example, the value of the activation control flag. The start control flag is a flag for determining which of the power-on recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, and the like is the start state at the time of power-on. For example, in the case of recovery from power failure, it is determined that the game is permitted, and in the case of setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc., it is determined that the game is not permitted.

The start control flag is composed of a combination of on / off information of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are off, the power is restored, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are on, the setting is changed, and the backup clear switch 176 is off and If the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed, and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is cleared.

When it is determined in S235 that the game is not permitted (NO in S235), the main CPU 201 performs the setting control process (S236). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed in, for example, the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. The details of the setting control process (S236) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the setting control process (S236), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S246.

When the game is not permitted (when the determination in S235 is NO), the main CPU 201 prohibits the launch of the game ball from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6), and a specific switch (for example, setting key 174, backup clear switch 176). Etc.), it is preferable to disable various switches, prohibit payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S235 that the game is permitted (YES in S235), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16), and the count value of the interrupt counter is the interrupt in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process of S237, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S238.

In S238, the main CPU 201 updates the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S238, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S239. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S239, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a big hit of a special symbol) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the payout. After executing the process of S239, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S240.

In S240, the main CPU 201 performs the switch input detection process. Details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S240, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S241.

In S241, the main CPU 201 performs the winning information command setting process. In this process, the transmission reservation process of the effect control command (winning information command) is performed. After executing the process of S241, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S242.

In S242, the main CPU 201 performs the effect control command transmission process. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process of S242, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S243, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 201 performs the performance display monitor control process. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, and the like are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) different from the work area in which the data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in the area to be backed up, for example, when the RAM is cleared. Is stored in the area where the data is not cleared. After executing the process of S244, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 201 performs a restore process of the register saved in S243. After executing the process of S245, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 201 performs the restoration process of the protection register saved in S231, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-5-16. Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the setting control process performed in S236 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of setting control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S251).

When it is determined in S251 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the setting change process (S252). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the setting change process (S252), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating the setting change (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S253 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (when the determination in S253 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the setting confirmation process (S254). Details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the setting confirmation process (S254), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S255.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S253 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, when it is determined that the RAM is clear (when S253 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257. ..

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation display process. In this process, the currently set setting value is displayed. After executing the process of S255, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S256.

In S256, the main CPU 201 performs the effect control command transmission process. In this process, the commands (initialization command, power failure recovery command, or setting operation command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S252), setting confirmation process (S254), or startup initial setting process (S25) are subordinates. It is transmitted to the control circuit 300. After executing the process of S256, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S257.

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing. In this process (WDT output process), the WDT clear register address read process, the WDT clear process, and the WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is appropriately performed. Then, after the processing of S257, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control processing and returns the processing to the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32).

[1-5-17. Setting change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the setting change process performed in S252 during the setting control process (see FIG. 33) will be described. Note that FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the backup clear switch 176 is pressed (S261). This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I / O port 205.

When it is determined in S261 that the backup clear switch 176 is not pressed (when the determination in S261 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S263. On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 is pressed (when the determination in S261 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs the update process within the range of the set value. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S263.

In this embodiment, in the setting change process, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176. However, in place of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch is provided to use this setting switch. The set value may be changed by operating.

In S263, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S263).

When it is determined in S263 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (when the determination in S263 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, when it is determined in S263 that the setting key 174 is turned off (when the determination in S263 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S264.

In S264, the main CPU 201 performs the first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. As described above, when the first normal pre-game processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S264), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 33).

[1-5-18. Setting confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the setting confirmation process performed in S253 during the setting control process (see FIG. 33) will be described. Note that FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S271). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S263 in the setting change process (see FIG. 34) described above.

When it is determined in S271 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (when the determination in S271 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the setting key 174 is turned off (when the determination in S271 is YES), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal pre-game processing (S272). Details of this second normal game preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. As described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the second normal game pre-processing (S272), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

[1-5-19. 1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the first normal pre-game processing performed in S264 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 34) will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal game preprocessing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed as an initial setting process when the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 17) is neither a power failure recovery, a setting change, or a setting confirmation, that is, when the RAM is cleared. ..

The main CPU 201 first performs the initialization RAM setting process (S281). In this process, a clear process (for example, construction of a work area and address setting) of an area (hereinafter, referred to as a “backup area”) in the main RAM 203 in which backup data is stored at the time of power failure is performed. The area where the data is stored is not cleared by the performance display monitor control process (see S244 in FIG. 32). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data are stored in the work area in the constructed main RAM 203, respectively. That is, the data backed up at the time of power failure is erased, and the game state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning the game state to the initialized state, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S281), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the initialization command. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S256) during the setting control process (see FIG. 33). When the process of S282 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal pre-game process. When the first normal pre-game process is completed, the game permission flag is set to on, and the game permission state is set.

[1-5-20. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S272 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 35) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game preprocessing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of recovery from the power failure in the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 17).

First, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at the time of recovery from power failure (S291). In this process, for example, the data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the work area in the constructed main RAM 203, respectively. The above-mentioned data is various information necessary for advancing the game, such as game state information, on / off state of hit flags of special symbols and ordinary symbols, and information on the number of pending numbers. That is, by returning the data backed up at the time of power failure to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power failure. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same game state as before the power failure, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game permission state is set. The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S292 after executing the RAM setting process (S291) at the time of recovery from power failure.

In S292, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is on. This process is performed by reading the data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203.

When it is determined in S292 that the probability change flag is not on (when the determination in S292 is NO), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S294.

on the other hand. When it is determined in S292 that the probability change flag is ON (when the determination in S292 is YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from the power failure. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, to turn on the probability change notification LED (not shown). This makes it possible to visually grasp whether or not the probability change flag is on when the power is restored. After executing the process of S293, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of the power failure recovery command. The power interruption recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (S256) during the setting control process (see FIG. 33). When the process of S294 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal pre-game process.

[1-5-21. Switch input detection processing]
Next, the switch input detection process performed in S240 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described with reference to FIG. 38. Note that FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs an abnormal state monitoring process (S301). Details of this abnormal state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol-related switch check process. This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I / O port 205. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol-related switch check process. This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I / O port 205. Then, when the first start port switch 121 and / and the second start port switches 141A and 141B are on, the start information of the first special symbol and / and the hold addition command of the start information of the second special symbol are reserved for transmission. NS. In this case, for example, when the look-ahead effect is executed, a specific hold addition command that can identify that the look-ahead effect is a hold to be executed is transmitted. After executing the process of S303, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 performs a prize ball-related switch check process. This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I / O port 205. Then, if the prize ball-related switch is on, the prize ball payout command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

[1-5-22. Abnormal state monitoring process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the abnormal state monitoring process performed in S301 during the switch input detection process (see FIG. 38) will be described. Note that FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of an abnormal state monitoring process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs an abnormal state monitoring pre-processing (S311). In this process, abnormality detection information (for example, information of various sensors set in the input port of the I / O port 205 is updated. The main CPU 201 executes the process of S311 and then performs the process of S312. Move to.

In S312, the main CPU 201 performs general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing. In this process, for each of a plurality of monitoring items to be determined for abnormality detection, whether or not there is an abnormality is determined for each monitoring item. After executing the process of S312, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs an induced magnetic field monitoring process. In this process, it is determined whether or not the induced magnetic field is detected, and if the induced magnetic field is detected, the induced magnetic field detection information flag is set to ON. Then, after the process of S313, the main CPU 201 ends the abnormal state monitoring process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 38).

[1-6. Sub-control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 40, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S321). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like are performed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S322.

In S322, the sub CPU 301 performs a read process of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, the command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set in the command input port 308 is read out. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the sub CPU 301 executes the command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S322 is analyzed. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S324.

In S324, the sub CPU 301 executes the effect mode determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request including the specified information of the effect content, and based on the generated animation request, various requests for operating various effect devices (for example, drawing request, sound request, lamp). Requests and character requests, etc.) are generated. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S325.

In S325, the sub CPU 301 executes the drawing control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the sub CPU 301 executes voice control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the voice control circuit 305. The voice control circuit 305 performs voice control for causing the speaker 32 to output voice based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S327.

In S327, the sub CPU 301 executes the LED control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or a part of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on the message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S328.

In S328, the sub CPU 301 executes the accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits the accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307. The accessory control circuit 307 is based on a message (accessory request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301, and is composed of all or a part of the accessory groups 58 (see FIGS. 1, 2, and 6). Drive control is performed to operate the effect drive motor (not shown). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, but the sub CPU 301 is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol is the main special symbol and the other is the sub-special symbol, and the effect control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state where left-handedness is recommended, the first special symbol is the main special symbol, and the gaming state where right-handedness is recommended (high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy). In the time-saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of the decorative symbol for the main special symbol, display effect of the character and the like, voice effect for the main special symbol, and the like. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the sub-special symbol is, for example, a big hit, for example, the sub-special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced.

[1-7. Small hit rush]
In the first pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small hit rush can be realized. The small hit rush will be described below.

As described above, the first pachinko gaming machine is provided with a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. Control to one of the gaming states. As described above, since left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal game state, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is mainly executed. In addition, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state), right-handed striking is recommended. The second special symbol game based on is mainly executed. When the winning opening included in the normal electric accessory unit 145 is used as the first starting opening, the first special symbol is in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. The game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the winning frequency of the game ball to the small hit large winning opening 151 is in another game state (for example, normal game state, high-accuracy time-short game state, low-accuracy time-short game state). ), It becomes a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of balls launched per unit time can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small hit rush will be described. First, the right-handed game ball almost passes through the passing gate 126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 140B in this embodiment) is not executed. Further, since the big hit winning opening 131 is not opened unless the big hit game control process is executed, the frequency at which the second starting port 140B is opened in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state is the game in which the time-saving control is executed. Low compared to the condition. Therefore, if the small hit large winning opening 151 is open, the game ball that is right-handed and distributed to the downward flow path 107b can win the small hit large winning opening 151. When a game ball wins in the small hit large winning opening 151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. Further, the game ball that is hit right and is distributed to the upper flow path 107a can win a prize in the second starting port 140A. When a game ball wins in the second starting ports 140A and 140B, for example, as shown in the hit determination table (see FIG. 9) of a special symbol, a stop showing a small hit with a relatively high probability of one-third (approximate). Not only is the display mode derived, but the ultra-fast variation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see FIG. 12B), so that the display mode is small. The winning frequency of the game ball into the winning large winning opening 151 is increased as compared with other gaming states (for example, a normal gaming state, a high-probability short-time gaming state, and a low-probability short-time gaming state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small hit rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state and the low accuracy time reduction game state), the second start port 140B is opened by the execution of the electric support control, and is hit right. Most of the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 107b win the second starting port 140B. Therefore, even if the small hit large winning opening 151 is open, the expected value that the game ball wins in the small hit large winning opening 151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball that is hit right and is distributed to the upper flow path 107a wins a prize in the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but the second starting port 140A is hit right and flows upward. Of the game balls distributed to the route 107a, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls win a prize. In this way, in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) paid out with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

Further, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is recommended, but if right-handed hitting is performed, a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol hit is derived when the right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 126. There is a possibility that the large winning opening 151 for small hits will be opened by the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 146 and the winning of the game ball in the second starting opening 140B. However, in the normal game state, since the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 12 (A)), the game is tentatively set in the second starting ports 140A and 140B. Even if the ball wins, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long fluctuations A to C having an extremely long fluctuation time, and the frequency at which the small hit large winning opening 151 is opened is extremely small. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to make a right-handed hit in the normal gaming state. When the winning opening included in the ordinary electric accessory unit 145 is used as the first starting opening, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol in the normal gaming state is set to, for example, 0 so as not to generate the actual profit of right-handed hitting. May be good.

In this embodiment, the game is configured to have a small hit rush in a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a small hit rush may be made in a high-accuracy time-shortening game state in which the special symbol shortening control for shortening the variable display time of the special symbol is executed without executing the electric support control.

[1-8. Signal output outside the machine]
Next, the output is output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), an island computer provided on each island (not shown)). The signal will be described. In this embodiment, the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described, but the signal from the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine may be input.

In this embodiment, the external terminal plate 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting a signal to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal plate 184 to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door / frame opening", "external information 1" to "external information 8". , "Prize ball information 2" and "security". However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, and these signals may be output. It may be configured so that one of the signals is not output.

FIG. 41 is a table showing an example of output conditions of a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 41, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output from CN1, the signal of "door / frame opening" is output from CH2, and the signal of "external information 1" to CH10 is output from CH3 to CH10, respectively. Each signal of "external information 8" is output, a signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH11, and a signal of "security" is output from CH12. The signal output conditions from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG.

Next, an example of the timing chart of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described by taking the signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec for every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 42 is an example of a timing chart of the signal of “Prize ball information 1” among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 42, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time one prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the big winning opening (the big winning opening 131 for big hits or the big winning opening 151 for small hits (see FIG. 4)), for example, 10 prizes are awarded. When the ball is paid out and the game ball wins at the starting port (first starting port 120 or second starting port 140A (see FIG. 4)), for example, three prize balls are paid out and the general winning opening When a game ball wins in 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, four prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine for, for example, 120 msec, each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 is at the timing when the payout detection switch of the tenth prize ball is turned on starting from the previous output of the signal of "prize ball information 1", for example, for 120 msec, the "prize ball". The signal of "Information 1" is output. Note that the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output only at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on. For example, the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is used. It may be between the time it is turned on and the time it is turned off. Further, it is only an example that the signal of "Prize ball information 1" is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out or output for 120 msec, and the output timing and output time of the signal of "Prize ball information 1". Can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be described. The "security" signal is mainly a signal output when an error occurs.

FIG. 43 is a table showing an outline of an error in the first pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, for each error name, the trigger of occurrence in the main control circuit 200 and the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6). It is a table showing the output time and remarks of the release trigger in, the signal of "security" (shown as "security signal" in FIG. 43).

The outline of the error shown in FIG. 43 is an example, and only a part of them may be determined to be an error. For example, an error not shown in FIG. 43 is determined to be an error. You may do so. Examples of errors not shown in FIG. 43 include a solenoid monitoring sensor error when the solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is turned on or off for a predetermined time or longer, and a big winning opening (big hit big hit). If there is an undischarged game ball inside the winning opening 131 or the large winning opening 151 for small hits (see Fig. 4), or if there is a prize in the large winning opening when the large winning opening is not opened, the large winning opening is entered. An abnormal discharge error, a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined time, and the like correspond. Further, for example, a specific area is provided in the jackpot game control 131, and the probability variation control is executed after the jackpot game control is completed based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific zone during the execution of the jackpot game control. In some cases, it is judged as an error even if the passage to a specific area is abnormal, or if the game ball passes through a specific area even though there is no undischarged game ball inside the big winning opening 131 for big hits. It is preferable to configure it so as to do so.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) transmits a fraud detection-related command to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub CPU 301 that has received the fraud detection-related execution executes notification control according to the content of the error.

Hereinafter, control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both refer to FIG. 6) will be briefly described by taking as an example the case where an abnormal winning error of the big winning opening for big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 43, for example, if one winning detection is performed after the initial power is turned on and before the first jackpot winning opening 131 (see FIG. 4) is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) ) Determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the jackpot for jackpot, and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. In addition, a fraud detection-related command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred in the jackpot for jackpot is transmitted to the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, since the output time of the “security” signal is 12 seconds regardless of any error, the device outside the machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (FIG. 6)). (See) and the island computer (not shown) can grasp the occurrence of the error by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot grasp the content of the error. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the output time of the "security" signal according to the content of the error, the device outside the machine that receives the "security" signal can grasp the content of the error. May be good.

When the sub CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) receives, for example, a fraud detection-related command indicating a jackpot abnormal winning error, the sub CPU 301 executes all or part of the following notification control, and receives the fraud detection-related command. When, for example, 30 seconds have passed since then, the notification control shown below is terminated.
-Notification control for displaying, for example, the characters "large winning opening abnormal winning error" on the display device 7 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the display control circuit 304.
-Notification control that outputs, for example, the voice of "a large winning opening abnormal winning error" from a speaker (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
-Notification control that outputs, for example, a beep sound from a speaker via a voice control circuit 305.
-Notification control in which the LED group 46 (all of which, for example, see FIG. 6) is fully lit in red, for example, via the LED control circuit 306.

If, for example, there is a power failure before 30 seconds have elapsed after receiving the fraud detection-related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

Further, when the sub CPU 301 receives, for example, a fraud detection-related command indicating a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error during execution of the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of a jackpot jackpot abnormal winning error, the above-mentioned Re-execute the notification control.

Next, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a table showing an example of signals output according to the gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 44, the signal to be output is indicated by ◯, and the signal not to be output is indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, the output signal is different depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, no signal is output during the normal game state (other than the big hit / small hit, other than the probability change / time reduction), and during the low probability time / short game state (other than the big hit / small hit), "external information 3". And "external information 7" are output, and the signals of "external information 3", "external information 5" and "external information 7" are output during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). It is output, and the signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output during the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit).

In this way, by making the output signal different according to the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201, an external device (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6)) or an island computer (for example) that can receive the signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6)) or an island computer (see FIG. 6). (Not shown)) makes it possible to grasp the state of the game in the pachinko gaming machine to which the external information is transmitted.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the normal game state) is during the normal game state (other than during the big hit / small hit, during probability change / time reduction). It is the same as the signal output to (other than). Similarly, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the low probability time and short game state) is the same as the signal output during the low probability time and short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). The signal output during the small hit game control process (during the high accuracy time and short game state) is the same as the signal output during the high accuracy time and short game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit), and is the same as the signal output during the small hit game. The signal output during the control process (during the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state (other than during the big hit and during the small hit). That is, an external device capable of receiving signals (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown)) executes a small hit game control process on a pachinko gaming machine to which external information is transmitted. It is not possible to know whether or not it is. However, instead of this, by making the signal output during the small hit game control process different from the signal output when the small hit game control process is not in progress, the pachinko game machine of the external information transmission destination has a small hit. Whether or not the game control process is being executed may be grasped by the device outside the machine that can receive the signal.

In addition, during the low-accuracy time-short game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), during the high-accuracy time-short game state (other than the big hit, other than the small hit), and during the small hit game control process (low accuracy) shown in FIG. During the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state), the signals are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, it may be assumed that the time saving control is being executed when both the electric support control and the special figure shortening control are executed, or only the electric support control is executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control. If this is the case, the time saving control may be being executed, or if only the special figure shortening control is being executed among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control, the time saving control may be being executed.

[2. Second pachinko machine]
Next, the second pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine is a so-called one-type pachinko gaming machine called a digi-pachi. However, the second pachinko gaming machine is different from the first pachinko gaming machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed. .. Therefore, the gaming board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from those of the first pachinko gaming machine.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second pachinko gaming machine, for example, the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3 and the like, and the outside of the second pachinko gaming machine from the external terminal plate 1184 (see FIG. 46) (for example). , Functions, shapes, placement positions, etc. are common to the first pachinko machine, such as signals output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 46) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island. The explanation of the above shall be omitted as much as possible.

In explaining the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine will use the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko machine The explanation shall be made using a code and a step number different from those of the gaming machine.

By the way, as a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed. When the variable display of is suspended, for example, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. There are pachinko gaming machines (hereinafter referred to as "sequentially fluctuating machines") in which starting conditions are satisfied in the order of winning, including the first starting port and the second starting port.

In the priority variable machine, the starting conditions of the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in the variable display, the jackpot game state, etc., and the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended. It is established when all certain requirements are met, such as not being, and the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the starting conditions for the second special symbol are the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is established when all of the certain requirements are satisfied, such as that none of the above is in the variable display, that the jackpot game state, etc., and that the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended.

Further, in the sequential variable machine, the starting conditions of the first special symbol are that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is in variable display, that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and that the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended. , The earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the start condition of the second special symbol is that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are satisfied. It is established when at least all of the conditions that the variable display is not in progress, the variable display of the second special symbol is held, and the earliest hold is the hold of the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the following, a priority variable machine will be described as an example.

[2-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko machine will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The gaming board unit 1010 is also arranged behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) and in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 45 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. A game area 1105 is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 1010 so that the launched game ball can roll and flow down.

The various members (for example, the first starting port 1120, etc.) arranged in the gaming area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine may be common to the various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. There is, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 45, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 1110, and a substantially center of the game area 1105. The center accessory 1115, the first starting port 1120, the general winning opening 1122, the passing gate unit 1125, the special electric accessory unit 1130, the second starting port 1140, and the ordinary electric accessory unit are arranged in the section. It includes 1145, an LED unit 1160, an out port 1178, and a back unit (not shown). The LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in the second pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
The game panel 1100 is formed with an opening (without a reference symbol) at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. In addition, a guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 1105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 1100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 1100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be provided in a part thereof to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference reference numeral) like the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 1105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 1006 (see FIG. 46 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 1115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 1116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 1105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball launched toward the game area 1105 by the launching device 1006 flows down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107. The game ball flowing down the left side region 1106 or the right side area 1107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 1100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region 1107.

Further, in the center accessory 1115, a warp entrance 1117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be able to be guided to the stage 1118 formed in the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 1007. The stage 1118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 1119 through which a game ball can enter is formed behind the stage 1118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 1119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 1120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 1117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 but has not entered the chance entrance 1119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 1120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 1120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 1007, and is arranged so that the left-handed game ball can win a prize (the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins the first starting port 1120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 46 described later). It should be noted that the right-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 1120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 1120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 46 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is extracted. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General prize movement)
A plurality of general winning openings 1122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 1122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 46 described later).

When the general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 46 described later) detects the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 1122 The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 1122 is replaced with the above general winning opening 1122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 1125 is arranged in the right side region 1107, and is configured to allow the right-handed game ball to pass through, and the passing gate switch for detecting the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126. It is a unit body integrated with 1127 (see FIG. 46 described later), is arranged in the right side region 1107, and is configured so that a right-handed game ball can substantially pass through. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 1126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is held up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The various reserved data are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 1127 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate unit 1125, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left side region 1106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 1107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 integrates the large winning opening 1131, the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 46 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of the game ball to the large winning opening 1131, and the special electric accessory 1133. It is a unit body that has been transformed. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right region 1107.

The large winning opening 1131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 1131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win is arranged, or a game is played at the upper part of the center accessory 1115. A large winning opening where the ball can win may be arranged.

The big winning opening 1131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is advantageous to the player. Is. When the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 46 described later) detects that a game ball has won a prize in the large prize opening 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the large prize opening 1131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 46 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134. The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, can win (pass) the game ball to the large winning opening 1131 or is easily opened, and cannot win (pass) the game ball to the large winning opening 1131. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. In the jackpot game state, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the jackpot game state is a game in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize opening 1131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is in a state.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 1140 is located in the left side region 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 1120). However, in the second starting port 1140, it is difficult or impossible to win a left-handed game ball due to, for example, a game nail, and the right-handed game ball can be won. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, it is not essential that the second starting port 1140 has such a configuration, and for example, it may be provided in the right side region 1107 so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize. Further, the second starting port 1140 may be configured so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 1140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 46 described later). When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 1140 is detected by the second starting port switch 1141 (see FIG. 46 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is extracted. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 1140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 1140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 1140 is not limited to this.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged in the left side region 1106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting port 1120), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win (pass). It is a unit body in which a winning opening, a switch for detecting the winning of a game ball in the winning opening, and an ordinary electric accessory 1146 are integrated. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141.

The ordinary electric accessory 1146 includes a general electric movable member 1147, which is a so-called electric chew, and a general electric solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 46 described later) that operates the general electric movable member 1147. The ordinary electric accessory 1146, that is, the movable member 1147 for general electric power, is in an open state in which the game ball can be won (passed) to the second starting port 1140 or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 1140. It is configured to be able to transition to a possible or difficult closed state. Instead of the so-called electric chew, which is a movable member for general electric power 1147, for example, a shutter capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction may be adopted.

(Out mouth)
Although the out port 1178 is launched toward the game area 1105, it wins a prize in any of various winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 1120, the second starting opening 1140, the large winning opening 1131, the general winning opening 1122, etc.). This is to discharge the missing game ball to the outside of the machine. The out port 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 1178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning openings 1122, so that the game ball flowing down the game area 1105 is discharged to the outside of the machine. It may be.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 1010 like the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007, and includes a production accessory group 1058 such as a movable accessory controlled by the sub control circuit 1300. The effect accessory component members constituting at least one or more of the effect accessory group 1058 function as the effect accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the second pachinko gaming machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko gaming machine, they will be described once again.

As shown in FIG. 46, the second pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 1200 that controls the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub control circuit 1300, a payout / launch control circuit 1400, and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (read / write memory), an initial reset circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main ROM 1202, the main RAM 1203, the initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 1201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and the main RAM 1203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201. .. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to the I / O port 1205 which is communicably connected to various devices and the like, and the command output port 1206 which is connected so that various commands can be output to the sub control circuit 1300 and the like. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, in the main control circuit 1200, the normal symbol display unit 1161, the normal symbol hold display unit 1162, the first special symbol display unit 1163, the second special symbol display unit 1164, the first special symbol hold display unit 1165, and the first 2 The hold display unit 1166 for special symbols, the solenoid 1148 for general electric power, the solenoid 1135 for special electric power, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 1170, the error notification monitor 1172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 1200. The main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, set values, and the like under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. Further, in addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 indicates, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process in progress. It is also possible to display the code etc. during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the first start port switch 1121, the second start port switch 1141, the pass gate switch 1127, the count switch 1132, the general winning port switch 1123, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 1200. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is transmitted to the main control circuit 1200 via the I / O port 1205.

Further, the main control circuit 1200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 1186 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. If it is an external terminal board 1184, a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the setting key 1174 operated when changing or confirming the set value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 are stored in the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 1176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation is connected. If the pachinko machine has a setting function, the backup clear switch 1176 may be used as a switch for changing the set value, or a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided. May be good.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the game hall cannot easily touch the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 in the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 1174 and / and backs up. It also includes those configured to come into contact with the clear switch 1176.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 and the power supply circuit 1450. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, a voice control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, an accessory control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in FIG. 46, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game production of the second pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores the image data, and a D / A that converts the image data as an image signal. It is equipped with a converter and the like.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing the decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 1032. The voice control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 1301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory group 1058 for production). The accessory control circuit 1307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the mechanical operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The payout / launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine, and the payout / launch control circuit 1400 includes a payout device 1082 for paying out the game balls and a game ball. A launching device 1006 for launching a ball, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 1200, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082, and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout / launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. The operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 1400 is based on the fact that the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the launch solenoid is adjusted according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to (not shown) to control the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout / launch control circuit 1400, and the like.

A power switch 1095 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout / launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which neither probabilistic control nor time saving control is executed, a high probabilistic time saving game state in which both probabilistic change control and time saving control are executed, and a time saving control in which probabilistic change control is not executed but time saving control is performed. A low-probability time-saving gaming state to be executed is prepared, and the main CPU 1201 can advance the game in any of these gaming states.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed hitting is recommended in the high-accuracy time-shortened gaming state and the low-accuracy time-shortened gaming state. The sub CPU 1301 executes a control for displaying the recommended striking method in the display area of the display device 1007, for example.

[2-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 47 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The hit determination table of the special symbol is a table referred to in the hit determination process of the special symbol, that is, "big hit" or "big hit" or "big hit" based on the big hit judgment random value acquired when the game ball wins the starting ports 1120 and 1140. This is a table that is referred to when determining "loss" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are only "big hits" and "losses", and other lottery targets (for example, small hits) are not included, but the first start port 1120 and / and the second start port When the game ball wins in 1140, it may be decided as another lottery target.

As described above, the jackpot determination random number value is a random number value used in the hit determination process of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process of the special symbol, it is determined as "big hit" or "miss" based on the extracted random number for big hit determination. In the hit judgment table of the special symbol, for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the range of the jackpot judgment random value determined as "big hit" for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variation flag (0 or 1). The relationship between the width) and the corresponding jackpot judgment value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random value determined as "loss" and the corresponding loss judgment value data are defined. There is.

In this embodiment, when the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random value is any of 0 to 204, it is regarded as "big hit". The judgment is made, and the judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random value is neither 0 to 204, it is determined as "missing" and the determination is made. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

Further, when the probability variation flag is turned on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted random value for jackpot determination is any of 0 to 935, it is determined as "big hit". The judgment value data is determined as "big hit judgment value data". On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the extracted jackpot determination random value is neither 0 to 935, it is determined as "missing" and the determination is made. The value data is determined as "loss judgment value data".

[2-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 48 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins at the start ports 1120 and 1140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is the table that is referred to when selecting "Design specification command". The "hit selection symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, and the "symbol specification command" is This command is used to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 48, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are as follows. Be selected. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 9, "z0" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, "z1" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, "z2" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the hit selection symbol command is selected regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Instead, "zA3" is selected as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 59, "z3" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 60 to 99, "z4" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the hit selection symbol command is selected regardless of whether the symbol random value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99. Instead, "zA5" is selected as the symbol specification command.

[2-3-3. Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 49 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table shows the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the probability variation flag, the value of the time reduction flag, and the number of probability variations according to the hit selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random value of the special symbol. , And when determining the type of jackpot, such as the number of time reductions.

In this embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the big hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "10", the value of the probability change flag is "1", the number of probability changes is "10000", the value of the time reduction flag is "1", and the number of time reductions is "1". It is decided to be "10000". When the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "4", the value of the probability change flag is "1", the number of probability changes is "10000", the value of the time reduction flag is "1", and the number of time reductions is "1". It is decided to be "10000". When the hit selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the value of the time reduction flag is "1", and the number of time reductions is "50".

If the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is "big hit", the big hit type is determined as follows. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10", the value of the probability change flag is "1", the number of probability changes is "10000", the value of the time reduction flag is "1", and the number of time reductions is "1". It is decided to be "10000". When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the value of the time reduction flag is "1", and the number of time reductions is "50".

However, the type of jackpot shown in FIG. 49 is an example, and is not limited to this. As described above, when the value of the probability variation flag is determined to be "0", the probability variation number is not set, but the probability variation number may be set to "0" in the sense that the probability variation control is not executed. ..

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 1203 like the probability change flag, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute the time saving control. In the time-saving game state in which the time-saving control is executed (for example, the high-accuracy time-saving game state or the low-accuracy time-saving game state in this embodiment), the time-saving flag is set to on and the time-saving control is not executed in the gaming state (for example,). In the normal gaming state in this embodiment), the time saving flag is set to off.

The time reduction number is a variable display number of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time reduction control. That is, for example, when the number of time reductions is determined to be "50", if the special symbol is variably displayed 50 times without winning a big hit in this time reduction game state, the time reduction game state ends and the non-time reduction game ends. It shifts to a state (for example, a normal gaming state in this embodiment).

As described above, the probability variation number "10000" is controlled for probability variation until it is determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process executed in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends (that is, the next jackpot). The purpose is to be able to continue execution. Similarly, the time reduction number of "10000" means that the time reduction control can be continuously executed until the next big hit.

[2-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 50 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the second pachinko gaming machine. The column of "Production content" in FIG. 50 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 1120, and the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 1140. Determine the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 50, the variation pattern of the special symbol is the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (win), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random value for reach determination, or /. And, although it is determined based on a random number value for effect selection and the like, the determination is not limited to this, and it may be determined based on another value or the like in place of or in addition to any of the above.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined fluctuation pattern of the special symbol has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 1308 of the sub CPU 1301 via the command output port 1206. The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 1032 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 include special symbol control processes performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Although different, the same applies to other processes. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine may be the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIGS. 29, 59), etc.). ), Hereinafter, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be described again with different step numbers.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S1001. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs the demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demo display effect. Since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as described in the first pachinko gaming machine is used. There is no.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S1001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S1002 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S1002 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1003.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S1003 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S1003 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S1004 that the first special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not held (when the determination in S1004 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process. , The process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1004 that the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S1004 is YES), the main CPU 1201 performs the process, S1005. Move to.

Returning to S1003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S1003 is YES), the main CPU 1201 performs the process. Move to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52. After executing the process of S1003, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1005) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the second pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed in a higher priority than the first special symbol. The priority variable machine to be used has been explained, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S1005) is executed in a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 1120. Alternatively, it may be a sequentially variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning the second starting port 1140.

[2-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The processing target of the special symbol management processing is the second special symbol when the determination in S1003 of the special symbol control processing is YES, and the processing target of the first special symbol when the determination in S1004 of the special symbol control processing is YES. It is a processing target.

The numerical values (“0” to “5”) shown in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 52 are control state numbers of special symbols. The main CPU 1201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S1011).

When it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S1011 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S1011 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1013. The main CPU 1201 performs the processing after S1013 based on the control state number read in the processing of S1012.

In S1013, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S1013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 53. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1014.

In S1014, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S1014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 54. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1015.

In S1015, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game determination process. The process of S1015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1016.

In S1016, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. The process of S1016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1017.

In S1017, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. The process of S1017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of the large winning opening opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 58. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1018.

In S1018, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S1018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of this jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

After completing the processes of S1013 to S1018, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51).

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S1021).

When it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S1021 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S1021 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 47) is referred to, and the hit determination of the special symbol is performed using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. In the hit determination process of the special symbol, first, a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit, it is determined to be a loss. After executing the process of S1023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result (for example, big hit or loss) of the hit determination process (S1023) of the special symbol. In this process, the above-mentioned "hit selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 48) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1024, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of the jackpot when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a jackpot. In this process, the jackpot type is determined according to the "hit time selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1024) with reference to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 49). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots, but there may be only one type of jackpot. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of jackpots, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol does not include the small hit, but the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may include the small hit, and a plurality of types of such small hits may be provided. good. After executing the process of S1025, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 50) is referred to, and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S1023) of the special symbol, the reach determination random value and / and the effect selection random value, etc. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined accordingly. It should be noted that the variation pattern table referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different depending on the game state and the like. After executing the process of S1026, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs the variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S1026) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 50). After executing the process of S1027, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of the special symbol variable display start process, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 52). S1014) will be performed. After executing the process of S1028, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1029.

In S1029, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 are updated. After executing the process of S1029, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1030.

In S1030, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S1030, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1031.

In S1031, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S1030), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S1031)) within the interrupt prohibition section. It is preferable to carry out with.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1041).

When it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S1041 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S1041 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S1015 in FIG. 52) is performed after the end process of the special symbol variable display end process is completed. See) will be done. After executing the process of S1042, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1043.

In S1043, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1043, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1044.

In S1044, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko game machine, the symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the fixed number of special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). You may manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the remaining number of times. After executing the process of S1044, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1051).

When it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S1051 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 52). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S1051 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S1052, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is a big hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S1052 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal or the like) output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 45) is generated and updated via the external terminal plate 1184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S1053, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 sets, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening 1131 is opened (S1055), a process of setting a big hit signal to the external terminal plate 1184 (S1056), and a control state number of the special symbol "3". Processing (S1057), game state specification parameter setting processing (S1058), transmission reservation processing of the jackpot start display command (S1059), and the like are performed. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1057) and switching the control state number, after the completion of the special symbol game determination process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (FIG. 52). S1016) will be performed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

Returning to S1052, when it is determined in this S1052 that the special symbol that has stopped is not the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S1052 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1051 to S1060) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1060 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 55) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 1201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol (S1061). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, it is possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S1061, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs the transmission reservation process (S1063) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1063, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52) as described above.

[2-4-7. Large prize opening preparatory process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1071).

When it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S1071 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S1071 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process of S1072, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1073.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S1073 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S1073 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1074. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1073 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S1073 is NO), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1077.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1074) and switching the control state number, the big hit end process (FIG. 52) is completed after the end of the big winning opening preparatory process. (See S1018) will be performed. After executing the process of S1074, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S1076). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1076, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52).

In S1077, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S1077, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1078.

In S1078, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 1131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 1131, the number of winning balls at the time of winning the large winning opening 1131, and the like are set. .. The number of rounds is equivalent to the number of times the large winning opening 1131 is opened. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those whose big prize openings are opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to control the number of rounds to be managed and the control to manage the number of times the large winning opening is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1078, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1079.

In S1079, the main CPU 1201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the large winning opening 1131 is performed. After executing the process of S1079, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1080.

In S1080, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process (S1080) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process (S1080) (See S1017 in FIG. 52) will be performed. After executing the process of S1080, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1081.

In S1081, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1081, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1082.

In S1082, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the large winning opening opening display command. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1082, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-8. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1091).

When it is determined in S1091 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S1091 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S1091 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 45) for counting the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winnings. The value of the large winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 1132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203.

When it is determined in S1092 that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 1131 is not equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (NO in S1092), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

On the other hand, in S1092, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when the determination in S1092 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1094.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S1078 in FIG. 57) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131 has not elapsed (NO in S1093), the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 1131 has elapsed (when the determination in S1093 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1094.

In S1094, the main CPU 1201 performs the closing setting process of the large winning opening 1131. After executing the process of S1094, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1095.

In S1095, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process (S1095) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the preparation for opening the large winning opening is made again. The process (see S1016 in FIG. 52) will be performed. After executing the process of S1095, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1096.

In S1096, the main CPU 1201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1096, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1097.

In S1097, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S1097, the main CPU 1201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-9. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1101).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S1101 is NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51).

When it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S1101 is YES), the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (for example, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.) and various counters (for example, probability variation counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, round counter, large winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or the process of resetting is performed. After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 56 is performed. After executing the process of S1103, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process, also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52), and returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, the third pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a 1-kind 2-kind mixer, and the first route and the second route are used as routes until the jackpot game state is controlled. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "big hit" is derived. In the second route, the V attacker is released by deriving the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is "the character opening hit", and the game ball that has entered the opened V attacker is V. This is the case when the V winning opening in the attacker is won.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a sequentially variable machine that does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, but executes variable display in the order of winning. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned priority variable machine may be used.

Hereinafter, in explaining the third pachinko gaming machine, for example, the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and the base door 3 and the like, and the outside of the third pachinko gaming machine from the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 61) (for example). , Functions, shapes, placement positions, etc. are common to the first pachinko gaming machines, such as signals output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) and island computers (not shown) provided on each island. The explanation of the above shall be omitted as much as possible.

In explaining the third pachinko gaming machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine will use the same reference numerals and step numbers as those of the first pachinko gaming machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration described with reference to the newly adopted drawings in the description of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions as the first pachinko gaming machine, the first pachinko machine The explanation shall be made using a code and a step number different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko machine will be described with reference to FIG. 60. The gaming board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 60 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. On the front side surface of the game board unit 2010, a game area 2105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down.

The various members (for example, the first starting port 2120, etc.) arranged in the gaming area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine may be common to the various members arranged in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. There is, but I will explain it once again.

As shown in FIG. 60, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, a guide rail 2110, and a substantially center of the game area 2105. The center accessory 2115, the first starting port 2120, the second starting port 2140, the general winning opening 2122, the passing gate unit 2125, the special electric accessory unit 2130, and the ordinary electric accessory unit are arranged in the section. It includes a 2145, an LED unit 2149, a V winning device 2150, an out port 2178, and a back unit (not shown). The LED unit 2149 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and the description thereof will be omitted in the third pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
The game panel 2100 is formed with an opening (without a reference symbol) at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. Further, a guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 2100, and game nails (without reference numerals) and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) jumps out from the guide rail 2110 toward the game area 2105, collides with a game nail or the like, and changes the direction of travel toward the lower part of the game area 2105. And flow down.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body is arranged in order to enhance the effect of the effect. The game panel 2100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or for example, only a portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be visually recognized from the front may be made of the transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member having no transparent portion (for example, wooden), and a transparent member may be provided in a part thereof to enhance the effect of the effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither of which has a reference reference numeral) like the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 2006 (see FIG. 61 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(Center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into the opening (without reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 above. The game ball launched toward the game area 2105 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball launched toward the game area 2105 by the launcher 2006 flows down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 or the right side area 2107 flows downward while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region 2107.

Further, in the center accessory 2115, a warp entrance 2117 is formed on the outer peripheral edge on the left side so that a game ball flowing down the left side region 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be able to be guided to the stage 2118 formed in the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. The stage 2118 may be formed in a plurality of stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 2118 substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 is discharged directly above the first starting port 2120. It is configured in. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of being the first start than the game ball that has not entered the warp entrance 2117 or the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 but has not entered the chance entrance 2119. It is designed to win (pass) the mouth 2120.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 2120 is arranged below the display area of the display device 2007, and is arranged so that the left-handed game ball can win a prize (the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). ing. When the game ball wins the first starting port 2120, it is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 61 described later). The right-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the first starting port 2120. Further, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting port 2120, a first starting port in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win) may be provided. good.

When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is detected by the first starting port switch 2121 (see FIG. 61 described later), the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is extracted. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition is satisfied, the reserved start information is subjected to the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the first starting port 2120 is not limited to three.

(2nd starting port)
The second starting port 2140 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a left-handed game ball may be able to win a prize in the second starting port 2140.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 61 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is extracted. Is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved start information is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize movement)
A plurality of general winning openings 2122 are arranged in the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a left-handed game ball can win a prize (a right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). Has been done. When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 61 described later).

When the general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 61 described later) detects the winning (passing) of the game ball to the general winning opening 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the game to the general winning opening 2122 The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of balls is not limited to four.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is arranged so that the right-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2122 is replaced with the above-mentioned general winning opening 2122. Alternatively, it may be provided with a general winning opening in which a right-handed game ball can be won.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right side region 2107, and is configured to allow the right-handed game ball to pass through, and the passing gate switch for detecting the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 2126. It is a unit body integrated with 2127 (see FIG. 61 described later), is arranged in the right side region 2107, and is configured so that a right-handed game ball can substantially pass through. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information is held up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The various reserved data are usually used for the hit determination process of the symbol. Even if the passing gate switch 2127 detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate unit 2125, the prize ball will not be paid out. Further, the passage gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left side region 2106 in place of or in addition to the right side region 2107.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 includes a large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61 described later) for detecting the winning (passing) of a game ball into the large winning opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. It is a unit body that integrates with. The special electric accessory unit 2130 is arranged below the passing gate unit 2125 in the right region 2107.

The large winning opening 2131 is arranged so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize (a left-handed game ball is difficult or impossible to win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned large winning opening 2131, a large winning opening in which a left-handed game ball can win is arranged, or a game is played at the upper part of the center accessory 2115. A large winning opening where the ball can win may be arranged.

The big winning opening 2131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be won (passed) when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is advantageous to the player. Is. When the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 2131 is detected by the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the large prize opening 2131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 61 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134. The special electric accessory 2133, that is, the special electric shutter 2134, is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (passed) through the large winning opening 2131, and it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball in the large winning opening 2131. It is configured to be closed and transitionable to. The big winning opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the big hit game state is reached through the first route described above. When the jackpot game state is reached through the first route described above, the state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the big hit game state after passing through the first route, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize opening 2131 shifts from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period over a plurality of rounds. It is a game state that made it possible.

(Ordinary electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 includes a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win (pass), a switch for detecting the winning of the game balls in the winning opening, and ordinary electric. It is a unit body in which the accessory 2146 is integrated, and is arranged in the right side region 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The ordinary electric accessory 2146 includes a general electric shutter 2147 capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and a general electric solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 61 described later) for operating the general electric shutter 2147. The ordinary electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric power, can win (pass) the game ball to the second starting port 2140 or is easily opened, and cannot win the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Or it is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. Instead of the above-mentioned general electric shutter 2147 that can advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be adopted.

(V winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided on the downstream side of the passage gate 2126 in the right region 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening / closing winning opening 2151 opened so that a game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 capable of opening / closing the opening / closing winning opening 2151, and the V attacker 2152. The V attacker solenoid 2154 that operates to open and close the opening and closing winning opening 2151, and the V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. The attacker count switch 2153, the V winning opening 2155 through which the game ball that entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening / closing winning opening 2151 can pass, and the game ball that entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening / closing winning opening 2151 are V. The V winning opening switch 2156 that detects that the game ball has entered (passed) into the winning opening 2155, and the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the open / close winning opening 2151 did not enter the V winning opening 2155. A loss opening 2157 through which a game ball can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 that operates this V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning opening 2155, and a V winning It is provided with a locking member 2160 capable of holding only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the device 2150. The V winning device 2150 may be provided on the upstream side of the passing gate 2126, or may be provided on the left side region 2106.

The V-attacker 2152 is composed of members along an arc, and is in a closed state in which the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is always closed. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the stop display mode indicating that it is a "feature opening hit" described later is derived, almost at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol is completed, the solenoid for V attacker 2154 ( The operation of FIG. 61, which will be described later) causes the V-attacker 2152 to operate, for example, once. When the V-attacker 2152 is operated once, the opening / closing winning opening 2151 opens, for example, 1800 msec. Then, while the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 is, for example, 10 per opening.

The mode of opening the V-attacker 2152 when the stop display mode indicating "per opening of the accessory" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, the opening of 900 msec may be performed twice. A predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls may be closed based on entering the inside of the V winning device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. When the V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout / launch control circuit 2400, and functions of the main CPU 2201. The value of the V attacker winning counter is added. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 2152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 2154 to open / close the winning even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) that can open the opening / closing winning opening 2151 has not passed. The mouth 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155. That is, the V winning opening 2155 is a winning opening that triggers the control to the jackpot gaming state via the second route described above.

The V winning opening switch 2156 detects the passage of the game ball through the V winning opening 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 61) detects the passage of the game ball through the V winning opening 2155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is opened, the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 61) continues the opening control of the V attacker 2152. That is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state via the second route. When the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled via the first route, the round game in which the big winning opening 2131 is changed from the closed state to the open state is executed, whereas the second round game is executed. When the jackpot game state is controlled via the route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is changed from the closed state to the open state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when the player is controlled to the jackpot game state via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is shifted from the closed state to the open state in the first round, but from the middle of the round game, for example, a big prize opening. A round game may be performed that shifts the 2131 from the closed state to the open state.

Further, for example, by providing a V winning opening inside the special electric accessory 2133 (that is, an area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is opened), the V winning opening and the big hit game The attackers released in the state may be one by one. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that "the accessory is open" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the game ball is placed in the V winning opening provided inside the special electric accessory 2133. Upon entering, it is controlled to the jackpot game state (the jackpot game state via the second route).

The loss opening 2157 is configured so that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning opening 2155 enters (passes). The game ball that has passed through the loss opening 2157 is discharged to the outside of the machine. If all of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the loss opening 2157 and the game balls do not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends. do.

The V-shutter 2158 has a closing mode in which the game ball cannot (or is difficult) to pass through the V winning opening 2155 due to the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 61 described later), and the game to the V winning opening 2155. A constant operation is always performed between the opening mode and the opening mode in which the ball can pass (or easily). In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 constantly operates in a constant operation in a cycle (cycle) of 7000 msec in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning opening 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150. The game ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 but is not held by the locking member 2160 is discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 2157. Even when a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 2157.

Further, after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed from the operation of the V-attacker 2152, the locking member 2160 is released from the locking of the game ball by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The unlocked game ball in the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning opening 2155, and if the V winning opening 2155 is opened at this timing, the game ball wins (passes) in the V winning opening 2155. If the V winning opening 2155 is closed at the timing, it will pass through the losing opening 2157. The game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning opening 2155 or the losing opening 2157 without providing the locking member 2160.

(Out mouth)
The out port 2178 is of various winning openings (for example, first starting opening 2120, second starting opening 2140, large winning opening 2131, V winning device 2150, general winning opening 2122, etc.) that are launched toward the game area 2105. The purpose is to eject the game balls that have not won or entered any of them to the outside of the aircraft. The out port 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 2178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning ports 2122 or between the special electric accessory unit 2130 and the second starting port 2140. The game ball flowing down the game area 2105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 like the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007, and includes a group of production accessories 2058 such as movable accessories controlled by the sub control circuit 2300. Of these production accessory group 2058, at least one accessory or the effect accessory component constituting the accessory functions as an operation accessory that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the third pachinko gaming machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko gaming machine, they will be described once again.

As shown in FIG. 61, the third pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, mainly controls the main control circuit 2200 that controls the game and the effect according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub control circuit 2300, a payout / launch control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read / write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, and the like, and is housed in a main board case (not shown). ing.

The main ROM 2202, the main RAM 2203, the initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring the operation, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the third pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and the main RAM 2203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201. .. In this embodiment, the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as needed.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying electric power so that the data stored in the main RAM 2203 is not lost in the event of a power failure or the like.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 has an I / O port 2205 connected so as to be able to communicate with various devices and the like, a command output port 2206 connected so as to be able to output various commands to the sub control circuit 2300, and the like. Also prepare.

Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, in the main control circuit 2200, the normal symbol display unit 2161, the normal symbol hold display unit 2162, the first special symbol display unit 2163, the second special symbol display unit 2164, the first special symbol hold display unit 2165, and the first 2 A special symbol hold display unit 2166, a general electric solenoid 2148, a special electric solenoid 2135, a V attacker solenoid 2154, a V shutter solenoid 2159, and the like are connected. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 2170, the error notification monitor 2172, and the like are also connected to the main control circuit 2200. The main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting signals via the I / O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, set values, and the like under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. Further, in addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 indicates, for example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress and a setting confirmation process in progress. It is also possible to display the code etc. during setting confirmation. As the setting changing code, a symbol that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device (for example, a setting changing symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first start port switch 2121, a second start port switch 2141, a passing gate switch 2127, a large winning opening count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winning opening switch 2156, and general. The winning opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is transmitted to the main control circuit 2200 via the I / O port 2205.

Further, the main control circuit 2200 is used when transmitting data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 2186 that manages pachinko game machines in the entire hall. If it is an external terminal board 2184, a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the setting key 2174 operated when changing or confirming the set value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 are stored in the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 2176 or the like that can be cleared according to the operation is connected. If it is a pachinko machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the set value, or a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided. May be good.

Further, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the game hall cannot easily touch the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176. "Inside the predetermined case" is not limited to the configuration in which the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be contacted unless the case is opened, but only the corresponding parts of the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 in the case are turned off. When a notch is provided and the pachinko machine is rotated from the island facility to expose the back using a key managed by the game hall manager, the game hall manager sets the key 2174 and / and backs up. Those configured to be in contact with the clear switch 2176 are also included.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this, and are connected to, for example, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 and the power supply circuit 2450. The configuration may be as follows. Also in this case, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the amusement park from easily contacting the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 2300 includes a sub CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, a voice control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, an accessory control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, and the like. The sub control circuit 2300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 61, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game production of the third pachinko gaming machine by the sub CPU 2301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub CPU 2301 controls the game effect according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for performing display control in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores the image data, and a D / A that converts the image data as an image signal. It is equipped with a converter and the like.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command from the sub CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data showing the decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 2032. The voice control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory group 2058 for production). The accessory control circuit 2307 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc. are provided.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the mechanical operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 2308 is connected to the command output port 2206 and receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The payout / launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine, and the payout / launch control circuit 2400 includes a payout device 2082 for paying out the game balls and a game ball. A launching device 2006 for launching a ball, a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like are connected.

Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out the game ball. ..

A ball lending operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving ball lending and a lending / returning button for receiving the return of the ball lending card in which cash data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a ball lending operation is performed by a player, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout / launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out the game ball based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

Further, the payout / launch control circuit 2400 is based on the fact that the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is rotated in the clockwise direction, and the launch solenoid is adjusted according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Power is supplied to (not shown) to control the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for the game to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout / launch control circuit 2400, and the like.

A power switch 2095 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout / launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65. The third pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description related to the setting function will be omitted below.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the probability variation control is not executed. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal game state in which the time reduction control is not executed and a time reduction game state in which the time reduction control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal game state or the time reduction game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed hitting is recommended in the short-time gaming state. The sub CPU 2301 executes a control for displaying the recommended striking method in, for example, a display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 62 is an example of a hit determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the game ball wins (passes) in the first starting port 2120, the lottery result is " It is decided as "big hit" or "miss". In addition, when the game ball wins (passes) in the second starting port 2140, the lottery result is "big hit" or "combination" in the hit judgment process of the second special symbol using the random value for big hit judgment of the second special symbol. It is decided to "per opening the object".

It is not essential that the "winning of the character opening" is not determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, but even if it is determined as the "winning of the character opening". , It is preferable that the determination is made only with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than the "big hit") as compared with the case where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. In addition, it is not essential that the hit determination process of the second special symbol is not determined as "missing", but if it is determined as "missing", it is "winning the character opening". It may be higher than the probability determined by, or it may be lower than the probability determined by "per opening of the character".

In the hit determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202, "big hit" or "loss" is used as the data used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the winning of the first start port 2120. The relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random value determined in 1 and the corresponding determination value data (“big hit determination value data”, “loss determination value data”) is defined. Further, as the data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second starting port 2140, the random value for the jackpot determination determined as "big hit" or "feature opening hit" is used. The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding judgment value data (“big hit judgment value data”, “accessory opening hit judgment value data”) is defined.

It should be noted that this third pachinko gaming machine does not have a function of changing the jackpot probability determined as "big hit", but this is not essential, and the probability change flag is turned on according to the type of jackpot, for example. It may be set so that the jackpot probability can be increased.

Further, in this third pachinko gaming machine, the total random number value of the jackpot determination random value is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number value is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

When the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability or / and the accessory opening hit probability may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the bonus opening hit probability may be set higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the bonus opening hit probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the jackpot may be set. The probability may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the probability of opening the accessory may be higher at the high setting than at the low setting. You may.

Further, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability and the accessory opening hit probability according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 is changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning opening 2155, or the number of times of shortening the time may be changed for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the winning probability of opening the accessory, the opening frequency of the V winning opening 2155 (that is, the operating frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time is shortened. By adopting one or two or more, the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state may be configured to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 63 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol acquired when the game ball wins at the start ports 2120 and 2140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is the table that is referred to when selecting "Design specification command". The "hit selection symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, and the "symbol specification command" is This command is used to specify the symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The symbol random value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 63, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are as follows. Be selected. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, "z0" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, "z1" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is any of 61 to 99, "z2" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the hit selection symbol command is selected regardless of whether the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99. Instead, "zA2" is selected as the symbol specification command.

Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 99, "z3" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when the hit determination value data for opening the accessory is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 95, "z4" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random value of the special symbol is 96 or 97, "z5" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random value of the special symbol is 98 or 99, "z6" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command.

[3-3-3. Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 64 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine. The jackpot type determination table is a jackpot such as the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the time reduction flag, the number of time reductions, etc., according to the hit selection symbol command determined corresponding to the symbol random value of the special symbol. It is referred to when determining the type of. The remarks column in FIG. 64 is described for convenience so that it can be easily understood.

As shown in FIG. 64, for example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state is "15", the value of the time saving flag is "1", and the big hit. The number of time reductions after the game state is determined to be "4".

In the hit selection symbol commands "z4", "z5", and "z6", when the judgment value data is "the winning judgment value data for opening the accessory" (that is, the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is the accessory. It is a hit selection symbol command (when it is an open hit), and the V attacker 2152 is opened by the opening hit of the accessory, and the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is detected, so that the jackpot game state is controlled. The number of rounds and the number of time reductions in the case are specified. Therefore, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the game ball is not controlled to the big hit game state, the big hit game state is entered. It is not controlled, and the number of time reductions specified in the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 64 is not set.

[3-3-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 65 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the third pachinko gaming machine. The column of "Production content" in FIG. 65 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120, and the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2140. Determine the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 65, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2140. 2 Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 65, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "big hit", the main CPU 2201 wins the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the game ball wins the first starting port 2120 ( It is determined based on the effect selection random value acquired at the time of passing).

Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "missing", the main CPU 2201 wins (passes) the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol by the value of the time saving flag and the first starting port 2120. ) Is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value acquired at the time of. Since right-handed hitting is recommended in the short-time game state, it is considered that the game ball rarely wins the first starting port 2120.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "big hit", the main CPU 2201 acquires the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on the random number value for selection.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "a hit for opening the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 sets the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to the second starting port. The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value acquired when the game ball wins 2140.

On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "per opening of the accessory" and the value of the time saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 changes the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol for the fluctuation time. Is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation effect of, for example, 600,000 msec. When the value of the time saving flag is "0", the game ball basically does not win (pass) the second starting port 2140, but an unexpected situation occurs and the second starting port 2140 should be used. Even if the game ball wins a prize, it is done in this way so as to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantager, but it is not always necessary to do so.

The reach determination random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of random numbers generated is not limited to the above.

When the time saving flag is on, the determined fluctuation pattern of the special symbol has a smaller expected value of the number of fluctuations per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is on tends to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time reduction flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effect output from the speaker 2032 based on the fluctuation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include special symbol control processes performed in S39 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16). Although different, the same applies to other processes. Therefore, in the following, the special symbol control process will be described, and the description of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. The processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end processing (FIGS. 29, 76), etc.). ), Hereinafter, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be described again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The control status number of the special symbol is a number indicating the status (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2002.

Although not shown, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process for setting the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001 when executing the special symbol control process.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols when executing the special symbol control process. Then, when both the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 2201 performs the demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 2300 receives the demo display command, the sub CPU 2301 performs a demo display effect. Since the second pachinko gaming machine is not a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, the concept of the main special symbol as described in the first pachinko gaming machine is used. There is no.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S2002 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S2002 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when the determination in S2003 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is reserved.

When it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is not the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not held (when the determination in S2004 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process. , The process is returned to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S2004 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process, S2005. Move to.

Returning to S2003, when it is determined that the second special symbol is the variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when the determination in S2003 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process. Move to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol management process. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibition section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed in a higher priority than the first special symbol. The priority variable machine to be used has been explained, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, it may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed in a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first start port 2120. Alternatively, it may be a sequentially variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning the second starting port 2140.

[3-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The processing target of the special symbol management processing is the second special symbol when the determination in S2003 of the special symbol control processing is YES, and the processing target of the first special symbol when the determination in S2004 of the special symbol control processing is YES. It is a processing target.

The numerical values (“0” to “7”) shown in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in FIG. 67 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

When it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is not 0 (when the determination in S2011 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time of the special symbol is 0 (when the determination in S2011 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. Then, the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2012, and then shifts the process to S2013. The main CPU 2201 performs the processing after S2013 based on the control state number read in the processing of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. The process of S2013 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". The details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. The process of S2014 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". The details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 69. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This process of S2015 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". The details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 70. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device opening preparation process. This process of S2016 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of the V-winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device opening control process. The process of S2017 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process. This process of S2018 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". The details of the large winning opening preparatory process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening control process. The process of S2019 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". The details of the large winning opening opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot end process. The process of S2020 is a process performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". The details of this jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 76.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the special symbol management process is called.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display start process is the process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process for which the first special symbol is the process target, the first special symbol is the process target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start processing is the processing called in S2013 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 68, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S2021).

When it is determined in S2021 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S2021 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S2021 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs a hit determination process for a special symbol. In this process, the hit determination table of the special symbol (see FIG. 62) is referred to, and the hit determination of the special symbol is performed using the random value for the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is the processing target, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is the processing target, it is determined whether it is a big hit or an accessory opening hit. In the hit determination process of the first special symbol, first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that the hit is not a big hit in this process, it is determined to be a loss. Similarly, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that the hit is not a big hit in this process, it is determined that the accessory is an open hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination process (S2023) of the special symbol (for example, a big hit, an opening hit of an accessory or a loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "hit selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 63) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process of determining or determining the type of jackpot when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, a jackpot or an accessory open hit. In this process, the jackpot type is determined according to the "hit time selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024) with reference to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 64). The type of jackpot determined when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is, for example, the opening of the accessory is due to the passing of the game ball through the V winning opening 2155 opened based on the opening of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. Further, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots and bonus opening hits, but there may be one type of jackpot or bonus opening hits. Further, instead of or in addition to having a plurality of types of jackpots and / and hits for opening the accessory, a plurality of types of loss may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs a variation pattern determination process of a special symbol. This process is a process of determining or determining a variation pattern of a special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 65) is referred to, and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the hit determination process (S2023) of the special symbol, the value of the time saving flag, the random value for reach determination and / and the effect selection. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random value and the like. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs the variable display time setting process of the special symbol. In this process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process (S2026) of the special symbol is determined as the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 65). After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting "1" in the control state number of the special symbol. By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 67) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display start process. It will be. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the number of remaining probable changes, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 are updated. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state management process. In this process, various flags related to the management of the game state (for example, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly, game state management process (S2030), special symbol effect start command transmission reservation process (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibition section. It is preferable to carry out with.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display end processing is called in S2014 during the special symbol management processing for which the first special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end processing is the processing called in S2014 during the special symbol management processing for which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

When it is determined in S2041 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "1" (when the determination in S2041 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S2041 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" in this way, the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 67) is performed after the end of the special symbol variable display end process. It becomes. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter. As described above in the description of the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, the symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the fixed number of special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). For example, the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of remaining probable changes and the number of remaining time reductions may be managed. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When this special symbol game determination process is the process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol to be processed, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol to be processed, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

When it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S2051 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. 67). See).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S2051 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not it is a big hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a big hit.

In S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol which is not a big hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is not the stop display mode indicating a big hit (when the determination in S2052 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2060. On the other hand, in S2052, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is a big hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the big hit (when the determination in S2052 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the opening hit of the accessory, and when the special symbol is the stop display mode which shows the loss, NO is determined in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal or the like) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) via the external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of a special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening 2131 is opened (S2055), the process of setting the jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and the control state number of the special symbol "5". Processing (S2057), game state specification parameter setting processing (S2058), transmission reservation processing of the jackpot start display command (S2059), and the like are performed. By performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the accessory opening hit, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in the stop display mode indicating the accessory opening hit.

In S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped, that is, the special symbol that has stopped is the stop display mode indicating loss (when the determination in S2060 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2061. On the other hand, in S2060, when it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped is the accessory opening hit, that is, the stop display mode indicating the accessory opening hit (when the determination in S2060 is YES), the main CPU 2201 performs the process, S2061. Move to.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the game control per opening of the accessory. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per opening of the accessory) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) via the external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting an upper limit value of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened, which is set in this process, is, for example, once. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a signal setting process (S2063) for opening the accessory to the external terminal board 2184, a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), and a game state specification parameter setting process (S2065). ), And processing such as transmission reservation processing (S2066) of the start display command per opening of the accessory is performed. By performing the process (S2064) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 of FIG. 67) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. This special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71. When the special symbol game end process is performed, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibition section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 70) will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game end process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 2201 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol (S2071). In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game is completed, and the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game can be executed. Become. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs the transmission reservation process (S2073) of the special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2073, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67) as described above.

[3-4-7. V prize device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

When it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (when the determination in S2081 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (when the determination in S2081 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time, the maximum number of times of opening, and the like as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operating pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to open a maximum of 1800 msec only once, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. For example, a maximum of 900 msec may be opened twice at a maximum. The first time may be opened, for example, up to 600 msec, and the second time may be opened, for example, up to 1200 msec. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns are provided within a range that does not exceed the specified time (for example, 1800 msec) in total for each opening of the accessory, and among these multiple opening patterns, for example, based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. It may be set to one open pattern. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs the V winning device open / close control process. In this process, the opening / closing control data generation process of the V winning opening 2155 is performed. After executing the process of S2083, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". By performing the process (S2084) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" in this way, after the completion of the V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 67). Will be done. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the V winning device opening display command. The V-winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-8. V winning device open control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

When it is determined in S2091 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S2091 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S2091 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 61), which counts the number of winning game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150, is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winnings. Will be done. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls won in the V winning device 2150 is not equal to or more than the maximum winning number (NO in S2092), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the V winning device 2150 is equal to or greater than the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2092 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening / closing winning opening 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 72) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (when the determination in S2093 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. (See FIG. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when the determination in S2093 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 closes the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not there is a V winning detection. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 2155 (that is, whether or not it has been detected by the V winning opening switch 2156) within the specified time. The above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 2150. For example, the game ball by the locking member 2160 within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 2152 starts. The above-mentioned specified time can be set within the specified time after the lock is released.

When it is determined that the V winning detection has been detected in S2095 (when the determination in S2095 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs the start setting process of the game control per V. In this process, a signal (for example, a V-per signal) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61) via the external terminal plate 2184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of a special symbol to be processed in the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V-hit game control is executed, for example, 15 rounds of round games are executed as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 64), so that the player has executed the jackpot game control process. As in the case, a large number of prize balls can be won. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V-per game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and referred to, but the V-per game control can also be referred to as the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) that is first executed based on the opening of the accessory is processed as the first round game. That is, the game control per V executed when it is determined that the V winning detection has been detected (S2095 is determined to be YES) is started from the second round game. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (that is, the number of times the V attacker 2152 operates) (S2099), and the V-per-V signal setting process (S2100) to the external terminal board 2184. , The process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), the game state specification parameter setting process (S2102), the transmission reservation process of the start display command per V (S2103), and the like are performed. By performing the process (S2101) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large winning opening opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process. It will be. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

Returning to S2095, when it is determined that there is no V winning detection in this S2095 (when the determination in S2095 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 71 is performed. After executing the process of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-9. Large prize opening preparatory process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the large winning opening opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

When it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (when the determination in S2111 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening preparation process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (when the determination in S2111 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. The count value (round counter value) of the round counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203. After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit value.

When it is determined in S2113 that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit value (when the determination in S2113 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". By performing the process (S2114) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" in this way, the big hit end process (see S2020 of FIG. 67) is performed after the end of the large winning opening preparation process. It will be. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67).

Returning to S2113, when it is determined that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S2113 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs a selection process of a large winning opening to be opened. In this process, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a big hit, and the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived (S2052 in FIG. 70 is determined to be YES). In the case of the big hit game control process, the big winning opening 2131 is selected as the big winning opening to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory, the stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived (S2060 in FIG. 70 is determined to be YES), and the V prize is detected (FIG. In the case of the game control per V started by (S2095 of 73 is determined to be YES), the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening / closing winning opening 2151) is selected as the large winning opening to be opened. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, the maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150, and the large winning prize. The number of prize balls at the time of winning the mouth 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is set. The number of rounds of opening the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that it is not intended to exclude those in which the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is opened a plurality of times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform control for managing the number of rounds and control for managing the number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2120.

The above-mentioned "large winning opening 2131 or V winning device 2150" corresponds to the large winning opening selected in S2118 as the large winning opening to be opened among the large winning opening 2131 and the V winning device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a large winning opening opening / closing control process. In this process, opening / closing control data generation processing of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". By performing the process (S2121) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" in this way, after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process, the large winning opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 67). Will be done. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the large winning opening opening display command. The large winning opening open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-10. Grand prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the large winning opening opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

When it is determined in S2131 that the control status number of the special symbol is not "6" (when the determination in S2131 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (FIG. See 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when the determination in S2131 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number. In this process, the large winning opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61) for counting the number of winning balls in the large winning opening 2131 or the V attacker count switch for counting the number of game balls entering the inside of the V winning device 2150. It is determined whether or not the value counted by 2153 (see FIG. 61) is the value of the maximum number of winnings. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the large winning opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2132 is NO), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, when it is determined that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (when the determination in S2132 is YES), the main CPU 2201 processes the process in S2134. Transfer.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the large winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 74) has elapsed.

When it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (when the determination in S2133 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening opening control process and performs the process. , Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (when the determination in S2133 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 closes the large winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process (S2135) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" in this way, after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed again. See) will be done. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs the game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the processing of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the large winning opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-11. Big hit end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (when the determination in S2141 is NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67). , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (when the determination in S2141 is YES), the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (for example, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.) and various counters (for example, probability variation counter, time reduction counter, symbol fixed number counter, round counter, large winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or the process of resetting is performed. After executing the process of S2142, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 71 is performed. After executing the process of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process in which the jackpot end process is called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibition section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibition section.

[4. Expansion example]
An extended example common to the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine described above will be described below. Since the reference numerals assigned to each configuration differ depending on the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, the following description describes specific pachinko gaming machines (particularly the third pachinko gaming machine). Unless the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine), the reference numerals will be omitted.

[4-1. Extended example of probabilistic control]
In the first pachinko machine and the second pachinko machine, it is decided whether or not to set the probability change flag on according to the type of jackpot, and when the probability change flag is set to on, the number of probability changes is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following aspects may be used.

For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process, for example, when it is determined whether or not a specific area provided in the jackpot has passed, and it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific region, the jackpot is determined. It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets the probability change flag on at the end of the game control process. In the above specific area, for example, the movable member operates in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, so that the game ball can pass through or is easily opened, and the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to displace to a possible or difficult closed state.

In such a V probability change machine, for example, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80, there are cases where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit and cases where the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed. When the result is a big hit, the ease of passing the game ball to the above-mentioned specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process, that is, the probability that the probability change flag is set to on at the end of the big hit game control process. It may be different.

FIG. 77 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in the specific round game during the execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example, and (A) is specified. The figure which shows the case where the opening mode of a region is a 1st opening mode, (B) the opening mode of a specific area is a 2nd opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of a specific area is a 3rd opening mode. Is. The first open mode and the second open mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third open mode is a mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific area. In the example shown in FIG. 77, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Note that FIG. 77 shows a mode in which the large winning opening is opened shortly and then opened long, but the opening mode of the large winning opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 77 (A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is also open while the large winning opening is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has become. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the jackpot to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in the open state from the start of the short opening of the large winning opening to the end of the long opening of the large winning opening. ing. Therefore, it is extremely easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening to pass through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. That is, the probability change flag is set on very easily at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), in the third opening mode, a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started (both of these two times are short time). ), The specific area is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even one of the plurality of game balls winning in the jackpot can pass through the specific area in either the first open mode or the second open mode. It is also difficult compared to. That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability change flag is turned on at the end of the jackpot game control process. It is set.

Note that FIG. 77 is an example of an opening mode of a specific area in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning the big winning opening is easily passed through the specific area during the execution of the big hit game control process. , An example of providing two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of open modes of the specific region in which at least one of the plurality of game balls winning in the jackpot is easy to pass through the specific region is limited to two modes. However, only one mode may be used, or three or more modes may be used.

Further, in FIG. 77, an opening mode of a specific area in which it is difficult to pass through a specific area even if only one of a plurality of game balls winning a prize in the big winning opening is being executed during the execution of the big hit game control process. As an example of the above, an example of providing the third open mode has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of open modes of the specific area where it is difficult to pass through the specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls winning the big prize opening is 1. The mode is not limited to that, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 78 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 78, when the winning determination value data is "big hit determination value data" (when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is a big hit), the first special symbol and the first special symbol 2 The hit selection symbol command of the special symbol is selected as follows. That is, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, for example, in the hit selection symbol command, "z0" is selected with a selection rate of 40%, and "z1" is selected with a selection rate of 10%. It is selected and "z2" is selected with a selectivity of 50%. When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, for example, in the hit selection symbol command, "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 15%, and "z4" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. It is selected and "z5" is selected with a selectivity of 35%.

FIG. 79 is an example of the jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 79, the jackpot type (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (3R normal big hit A) of the third opening mode. When the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (10R normal big hit A) of the third opening mode. Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (10R probability variation big hit A) of the first opening mode. When the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the big hit (10R normal big hit B) of the third opening mode. When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot B) of the first opening mode. When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot C) of the second opening mode.

That is, according to FIGS. 77 to 79 above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit, the type of big hit is determined to be 3R normal big hit A with a selectivity of 40%, and 10%. The selectivity of is determined to be 10R normal jackpot A, and the selectivity of 50% is determined to be 10R probability variation jackpot A. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the type of big hit is determined to be 10R normal big hit B with a selection rate of 15%, and 10R probability variable big hit B with a selection rate of 50%. , 35 is determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot C. In this way, depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a big hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a big hit, the probability change flag is set at the end of the big hit game control process. It is possible to make the probability of being set on different.

In the specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to the mode in which the specific area is opened by the time control as shown in FIGS. 77 (A) to 77 (C). As shown in FIG. 80, the mode may be opened according to the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening.

FIG. 80 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the big hit game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning). (Example) in which the opening mode is controlled based on the winning of the mouth, and (A) the opening mode of the specific region is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific region is the second. It is a figure which shows the case of an open mode.

As shown in FIG. 80 (A), in the first opening mode of the other example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening counts. When the switch detects the winning of the first game ball, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the big winning opening is closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area is open. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one of the plurality of game balls that have won the jackpot to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), in the second opening mode of the other example, after the large winning opening is opened, the first game ball wins in the large winning opening, and the large winning opening is won. Only when the winning of the first game ball is detected by the mouth count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time. Then, even if the second game ball wins in the big winning opening and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning opening count switch, the specific area is until the winning opening is closed. Does not open and remains closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, it is more difficult to pass through the specific area even if only one of the plurality of game balls that have won the big prize opening is compared with the first open mode. That is, it is difficult for the probability change flag to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability changes at the end of the jackpot game control process. The flag is set on.

In the above description, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the probability variation flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. If the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the time saving flag may be set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process. Such specifications are particularly effective when the machine is a type 1 or type 2 mixer such as a third pachinko machine.

Further, in the above, the same opening mode is used as the opening mode of the specific area depending on whether the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit or the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. Although the example of providing is described, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening mode dedicated to the first special symbol or an opening mode dedicated to the second special symbol may be provided.

Further, in the above, the passage of the game ball to the specific area is performed in both the case where the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit and the case where the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit. An example that can be determined in the difficult third aspect has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the hit determination process of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is a hit, at least one is used. The game ball may be configured to be determined only in the mode (first mode or second mode) in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific region.

Further, in the above, in the third aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is set twice at a predetermined time during the short opening of the large winning opening and after the long opening of the large winning opening is started. It has been open for a short time (both for a short time), but if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area may be opened once or multiple times. There may be.

In addition, the closing of the specific area is closed according to the passage of a predetermined opening time or the end of the round in which the specific area is opened, or is closed according to the specified number of large winning openings or winning in the specific area. It may be controlled to do so. Moreover, one or a plurality of conditions for closing may be compounded.

Further, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variation control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-shortening game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are set to a predetermined upper limit number of times (hereinafter, referred to as "limiter number of times"). It may be a so-called limiter machine that is repeatedly executed alternately until it reaches the limit. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as "loop number") reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. It is controlled to (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.). At this time, the number of loops is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the number of limiters may be a fixed number, for example, may be determined according to a symbol random value of a special symbol, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, if it is a setting machine, the number of limiters may be different depending on the set value.

In the above description, the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variation control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot game state and the game state. , The game state in which the time saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until the number of limiters is reached. In particular, it is effective when it is a type 1 type 2 type mixer such as a third pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the case of the above-mentioned V probability change machine, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the probability change control is executed is continued. Therefore, in such a V probability change machine, if the number of limiters is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth big hit game control process, it is assumed that the predetermined number of limiters has been reached. The game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability change control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, the game does not reach the predetermined limiter number of times, but the specific area is played during the execution of the jackpot game control process. Since the ball has not passed, even in such a case, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to the game state in which the probability variation control is not executed. The same applies to a gaming machine in which the time saving flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process.

Further, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the probability variation control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-accuracy time-shortening game state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, etc.). It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which the probability variation control is not executed when the special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games in which the probability variation control is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “ST number”) may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Further, if it is a setting machine, the expected value of the number of STs may be different depending on the set value. Further, for example, it may be a so-called fall-type gaming machine in which a fall lottery is performed and the probability variation control is completed based on the result of the fall lottery. , A so-called V probability variation type gaming machine in which probability variation control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be used.

[4-2. Extended example of time saving control]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving control can be executed after the big hit game control process is completed. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, the time saving control may be executed.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a loss, a specific random value among the random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port (for example, for special symbol hit determination) A random value, a symbol random value of a special symbol, etc.) may be used to perform a time saving winning determination process for determining whether or not to execute the time saving control, in addition to the special symbol hit determination processing. When the time saving winning judgment is performed when the result of the special symbol hit judgment processing is a small hit or a loss, for example, the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a specific symbol disorder. If it is a numerical value, it can be determined as a "time saving hit" in which the time saving control is executed. When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving hit determination process may be performed.

Further, when the time saving winning determination processing is performed separately from the special symbol hit determination processing, the time saving winning determination processing may be executed prior to the special symbol hit determination processing in the same frame.

Further, when the above-mentioned time-saving winning determination processing is performed, a random number for determining the time-saving winning, which is exclusively used for the time-saving winning determination processing, is generated within a predetermined range, and for example, the time-saving winning is applied based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A random number value may be extracted, and the time-saving winning determination process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning.

In addition, it is not essential that the random number value used for the time saving winning determination process is extracted based on the winning of the game ball at the starting port, and other areas (for example, general winning opening, small hit winning opening, etc.) It may be extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the big winning opening, etc.). Further, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination processing is provided, and a random number value to be used for the time saving winning determination processing is extracted based on, for example, the passing of the game ball through this dedicated area. You may do so.

By the way, for example, when the time saving winning judgment processing and the special symbol hit judgment processing are executed at different timings, the time saving winning judgment processing is performed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the stop display mode indicating the big hit is derived when the confirmation display is performed. It is executed, and the result of this time saving hit determination process may be "time saving hit". In such a case, the main CPU may forcibly derive, for example, a display mode indicating "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving winning determination processing is "time saving hit".

In addition, the sub CPU can visually grasp whether the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or an easy effect image (for example, a variation effect of a decorative pattern or a character). It is preferable to execute the control of displaying the display effect by the display device on the display device. In this case, since the result of the time saving winning determination processing is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special symbol hit determination processing, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, it is possible to visually grasp whether the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving hit" or "time saving loss", or instead of displaying an easy effect image on the display device, the time saving winning judgment is made. A display device that displays an effect image (for example, a variation effect of a decorative pattern, a display effect by a character, etc.) in which it is impossible or difficult to visually grasp whether the processing result is a "time reduction hit" or a "time reduction loss". You may execute the control to display in. In this case, it is possible to maintain the interest until the result of the time saving winning determination process is disclosed.

Further, in a general pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the sub CPU displays an effect image showing, for example, a right-handed instruction as a method of launching a game ball recommended in the big hit game state. It is controlled so that it is displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this respect, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a big hit, when the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU performs the time reduction control. As a recommended method of launching a game ball, for example, it is controlled so that an effect image indicating a right-handed instruction is displayed on the display device. However, when the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time saving hit", the effect image showing the recommended method of launching the game ball when the time saving control is executed may always be displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "time reduction hit" is more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times or more), it is displayed, and if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than 2 times), it is not displayed. You may do so. The above-mentioned specific condition is not limited to the condition of the number of time reductions, and may be an arbitrary condition as appropriate.

Further, when the time saving hit determination processing is executed before the special symbol hit determination processing is executed, the sub CPU is in a situation where the time saving hit is set (that is, a situation in which the time saving flag is set to on). A control may be executed to display an effect image that can be visually grasped or easily grasped on the display device as to whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is executed.

It should be noted that the type of random value used for the time saving winning judgment processing, the extraction timing of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing, the condition for determining the time saving hit in the time saving winning judgment processing, the execution timing of the time saving winning judgment processing, and the time saving winning judgment processing. The game state that can be executed, the mode of the time saving game state, the time saving number set at the time saving hit, the start timing of the time saving game state, the ending timing of the time saving game state, the time saving number rewriting timing, the time saving hit probability, and the time saving winning judgment. The following is a summary of the processes related to time reduction, such as displaying the results of the processes.

(Type of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The random number values used in the time saving winning judgment processing include, for example, a random value for determining a special symbol hit, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for determining a normal hit, a random value for determining a normal symbol, a random value for determining a special symbol fall, and a random value for determining a special symbol fall. It may be any one of a plurality of types of random values such as a dedicated random value for determining the time saving. Further, if it is a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time saving winning / winning determination process may be performed using the changed setting value.

Further, the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is not limited to one type (for example, only the time saving winning judgment random value), and a plurality of types of random values (for example, a special symbol hit judgment random value and a symbol determination random value). ) May be used to determine.

(Extraction timing of random value used for time saving winning judgment processing)
The extraction timing of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing is such that when the game ball wins the starting port that triggers the special symbol hit judgment processing, the game ball passes through the passing gate that triggers the execution of the normal symbol hit judgment processing. The time may be any timing, such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time saving winning determination process. In addition, the extraction of the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing may be performed based on the winning of a specific winning opening or the like in which the prize ball is paid out, or a specific gate or a specific out where the prize ball is not paid out. It may be done based on the passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, when the random value for the time saving winning judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passing) of the game ball to the starting port, when the game ball wins in either the first starting port or the second starting port. Even if there is, the random value for determining the time saving win may be extracted, or the random value for determining the time saving winning may be extracted only when the game ball wins at one of the specific starting ports.

(Conditions for determining time saving hit in the time saving winning judgment process)
When the time saving winning judgment processing is performed using the extracted time saving winning judgment processing random value, the extracted time saving winning judgment random value is a specific time saving winning judgment random value (for example, specific time saving winning judgment value data). It is advisable to make it judged as a time saving hit at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time saving winning judgment processing using the special symbol hit judgment random value, the time saving is shortened when it is a specific loss judgment value data, a specific small hit judgment value data and / or a specific big hit judgment value data. It is good to judge it as a hit. In addition, when executing the time saving hit determination process using the symbol random value of the special symbol, it is preferable to determine that it is a time saving hit when it is a specific lost symbol, a specific small hit symbol, or a specific big hit symbol. .. Further, when the time saving hit determination process is executed using the special symbol fall determination random value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the special symbol fall determination random value data is used. Further, when the time saving winning determination process is executed using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time saving hit is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time saving winning judgment processing is performed using the normal hit judgment random value or the normal symbol determination random value. Furthermore, the conditions for determining the time reduction hit in the time reduction winning determination processing are not limited to the above conditions, and can be arbitrarily determined to various conditions.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the hit of opening the accessory. When the gaming ball that has entered the V winning device 2150 passes through the V winning opening 2155 when the V attacker 21522152 is opened, whether or not to execute the time saving control and the number of times of time saving are determined according to the type of opening of the accessory. It is good to do so. Then, even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the big hit game control process is executed. If not, the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not the time reduction control is executed and the number of time reductions based on the "time reduction hit" if the result of the time reduction winning determination process is "time reduction hit". However, the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving loss", the result of the special symbol hit judgment processing is the opening of the accessory, and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened. If does not pass through the V winning opening 2155, the time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time saving winning judgment processing)
When the time saving winning judgment process is executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the time saving winning judgment random value acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball at the starting port, the main CPU performs the start information of the special symbol. Similarly to the above, it is advisable to reserve the acquired random number value for determining the time reduction.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time saving winning determination process immediately after extracting the random number value to be subjected to the time saving winning determination processing (for example, before it is held), or holds the extracted random number value and holds the extracted random number value. The time saving winning determination processing may be executed before the variable display of the special symbol is started, or the time saving winning determination processing may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

(Game state in which the time saving winning judgment process can be executed)
The time saving winning determination process may be executed in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state, or the time-saving control is not executed in the gaming state (for example, normal). It may be executed only in the gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, etc.). Further, for example, conditions for executing the time saving winning determination processing such as executing the time saving winning determination processing in any game state or executing the time saving winning determination process only in a specific gaming state are set in advance, and this determination is made. When the specified condition is satisfied, the time saving winning determination process may be executed.

(Mode of time saving control)
The mode of the time saving control executed according to the type of the jackpot and the mode of the time saving control executed according to the result of the time saving winning determination processing may be the same mode or different modes. For example, a first time saving flag and a second time saving flag are prepared, and when the time saving control is executed according to the jackpot type, the first time saving flag is set to on and based on the result of the time saving winning judgment processing. When the time saving control is executed, the second time saving flag may be set to on. In this case, it is preferable that the time saving control having different functions is executed depending on whether the first time saving flag is set to on or the second time saving flag is set to on. For example, when the first time saving flag is set to on, both the special figure shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time saving flag is set to on, the special figure shortening control and the electric support are performed. Only one of the controls can be performed. When the first time saving flag is set to on, the control is performed in the first time saving game state in which only the special figure shortening control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control, and the second time saving flag is turned on. When set to, it may be controlled to the second time saving game state in which only the electric support control is performed among the special figure shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the plurality of time saving flags is set to be turned on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing, or the time saving winning determination processing is executed. It may be decided according to the game state at the time of being played.

(Time reduction number set when hitting time reduction)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit" is determined according to the gaming state when the time reduction winning determination processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a plurality of time saving winning judgment random numbers are defined as time saving hit judgment value data, the set time saving number of times is set to the gaming state when the time saving winning judgment processing is performed. Alternatively or additionally, it may be determined according to the extracted random value for determining the time saving. For example, if the time saving winning judgment random value extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is the first time saving hit judgment value data, the time saving number is determined to be "100" and the second time saving is determined. In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of time reductions to "50".

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU may newly set (that is, reset the time saving remaining number) the time saving number determined based on the" time saving hit "instead of the time saving remaining number. In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the number of times of time reduction newly set is larger or less than the number of times of time reduction remaining, and the range of gameplay is widened. It is possible to have a hobby and enhance the interest.

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU may add the number of time reductions determined based on the" time reduction hit "to the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the number of remaining time reductions is not less than the current number of time reductions, the player can play the game with peace of mind in the gaming state in which the time reduction control is executed.

Further, even in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed (for example, the high accuracy time reduction game state, the time reduction game state, etc.), the time reduction winning determination processing is executed, and the result of this time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". In the case of ", the main CPU newly sets the time reduction number determined based on the" time reduction hit "instead of the time reduction remaining number, and sets the time reduction number determined based on the" time reduction hit ". Of the processes to be added to the number of times, one of them may be determined in advance, and the number of time reductions may be set in a manner satisfying the predetermined conditions.

It should be noted that, in the pachinko gaming machine in which the time saving control having different functions is executed depending on whether the first time saving flag is set on or the second time saving flag is set on, the time saving winning determination process is performed. When the result of is "time saving hit", the main CPU has a time saving of a function different from the case where the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the same function. The process of setting the number of time reductions may be changed depending on the case of control. For example, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are the time saving controls having the same function, the time saving number determined based on the "time saving hit" is used as the time saving remaining number. If the time saving control that is added and executed and the time saving control that is executed based on the "time saving hit" are different functions, the time saving control is based on the "time saving hit" instead of the remaining number of times that are being executed. The time saving number determined by the above may be newly set (that is, the remaining time saving number may be reset). In addition, when the time saving control during execution and the time saving control executed based on the "time saving hit" are different functions of the time saving control, the time saving based on the "time saving hit" is performed after all the remaining times of the time saving during execution are exhausted. Control may be performed.

When the number of time reductions is set based on the result of the time reduction winning determination process being "time reduction hit", the number of time reductions may be set to "0". That is, when the number of times of time reduction to be set is determined to be "0", the time reduction flag is set to on even though the result of the time reduction winning determination processing is "time reduction hit". Further, when the result of the time reduction winning determination process performed during the execution of the time reduction control is "time reduction hit" and the number of time reductions is set to "0", the time reduction control during execution ends.

(Start timing of time reduction control)
The start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction winning determination processing being "time reduction hit" can be set to the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the time reduction control can be started based on the elapse of the special symbol determination time for determining the special symbol. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time saving control executed based on the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving hit" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time saving winning judgment processing becomes the special symbol hit judgment processing in the same frame. If it is done in advance, even if the result of the time saving hit judgment processing is "time saving hit", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment processing is a big hit, "time saving hit" is invalidated (based on "time saving hit"). It is preferable that the time saving flag is not set on) and the time saving flag is set on based on the hit time selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of big hit).

Further, the start timing of the time saving control executed based on the result of the time saving winning determination processing is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, when the time saving winning judgment processing is performed prior to the special symbol hit judgment processing in the same frame, even if the time saving control is started immediately (before the special symbol hit judgment processing is performed) based on the result of the time saving winning judgment processing. good. In this case, the gaming state (that is, whether or not the time saving control is executed) may differ between the time of extracting the random number value used for the time saving winning judgment processing and the time of executing the time saving winning judgment processing, which can enhance the interest. It becomes.

Further, the start timing of the time reduction control executed based on the result of the time reduction winning / losing determination processing being "time reduction hit" may be set after the predetermined number of games have been executed. In this case, after the result of the time reduction winning determination process is "time reduction hit", the sub CPU executes a fanning effect of whether or not the time reduction control is started until the time reduction control is started. It will be possible to enhance the interest.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol being a jackpot (a jackpot for which the time saving control is executed), the jackpot game control ends. Based on the above, it is advisable to start the time saving control based on the jackpot. Further, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which the time reduction control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 is opened, the game ball passes through the V winning opening 2155. Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable that the time saving control is started based on the end of the jackpot game control. Further, the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time saving hit determination process is "time reduction hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is the accessory opening hit. Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU will reduce the time based on the "time saving hit" based on the opening / closing winning opening 2151 being closed. It is advisable to start control.

(End timing of time saving game state)
The timing at which the time saving game state ends is, for example, "when the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the set time saving number of times in the game state where the time saving control is executed" and "in the game state where the time saving control is executed". , When the jackpot game state is controlled based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process "or" When the number of time reductions is set to 0 even though the result of the time reduction hit determination process is a time reduction hit ", etc. Is.

If the small hit game control process is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process in the game state in which the time reduction control is executed, the time reduction control is continuously executed even after the small hit game control process is completed. Will be done.

In the third pachinko gaming machine, the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is opened by deriving the stop symbol mode indicating that the hit determination process of the special symbol is the opening of the accessory during the execution of the time saving control. However, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 is opened and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 will be used even after the opening / closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Continue to execute time saving control.

(Rewrite time saving number of times)
When the time saving winning determination process is executed in a gaming state in which the time saving control is executed (for example, a high accuracy time saving gaming state, a time saving gaming state, etc.) and the result of this time saving winning determination process is "time saving hit", the main CPU , The time saving number may be rewritten, or the time saving number may not be rewritten (that is, the time saving control is executed until the time saving number in the running time saving control is exhausted).

When rewriting the number of time reductions, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time reductions determined based on the "time reduction hit" when the number of time reductions in the running time reduction control is exhausted. It may be set at the time of executing the special symbol hit determination process, at the start or stop of the variable display of the special symbol, at the time reduction winning determination process, or at various timings. can do. In addition, when it is set at the time of the time reduction winning determination processing, the time reduction number determined based on the "time reduction hit" is overwritten with the time reduction number in the time reduction control during execution. Further, the number of time reductions may be set in a manner that satisfies the predetermined conditions by predetermining one of "rewriting the number of time reductions" and "adding to the previous number of time reductions".

(Probability of hitting time reduction)
When the time saving winning determination process is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port or the second starting opening, the time saving winning determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port (hereinafter, "No. 1" The time saving hit probability is referred to as "1 time saving winning judgment processing") and the time saving winning judgment processing (hereinafter referred to as "second time saving winning judgment processing") performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. May be different. For example, the time saving hit probability when the second time saving winning judgment processing is performed may be higher than the time saving hit probability when the first time saving winning judgment processing is performed, or the second time saving winning judgment processing may be performed. The time saving hit probability when the first time saving winning judgment processing is performed may be higher than the time saving winning probability when the first time saving hit is performed, or when the first time saving winning judgment processing is performed and the second time saving winning judgment processing is performed. The probability of hitting the time reduction may be the same or almost the same as that of the case where.

(Display of the result of the time saving winning judgment processing)
The number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction winning judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (whether it is a time reduction hit or the time reduction loss) and / and the result of the time reduction winning judgment processing (time reduction hit). A winning time reduction number display unit may be provided to display. It is preferable that the time reduction winning determination result display unit and / and the winning time reduction number display unit are provided in the LED display group including the special symbol display unit and the like so as to be controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub CPU may display the result of the time reduction winning determination process and / or the number of time reductions determined based on the time reduction hit on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. good.

(interval)
When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction hit determination process is "time reduction hit", the main CPU sets the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game. The interval time may be longer than the above interval time when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a loss and the result of the time reduction win / loss determination process is a “time reduction loss”. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, the sub CPU displays, for example, an effect image indicating that it is a "time saving hit" until the above interval time elapses. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination processing of the special symbol is the winning of the accessory opening and the big hit game control processing is not executed based on the hit of the opening of the accessory, the main CPU 2201 loses the time saving. The interval time after the end of the operation for opening the accessory when the result of the judgment process is "time saving hit" is made longer than the above interval time when the result of the time saving winning judgment processing is "time saving loss". It may be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Extended example related to management of game media]
The first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine described in the present specification play a game using a game medium, and a privilege (for example, a prize) is obtained based on the result of the game. It can be applied to all gaming machines in which balls, prize balls, prize data, etc.) are given. That is, if the game is played by launching or inserting a game medium (for example, a game ball, a medal, etc.) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. Instead, the main control circuit itself may be capable of electromagnetically managing the game medium owned by the player and enabling a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, the game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game medium.

In the case of a gaming machine that circulates the enclosed gaming balls to play a game, the gaming balls as a gaming medium are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that the prize balls will be paid out when a prize is won. Instead, prize ball data as a game medium is given. In this specification, the "game value to be paid out" includes the meaning of both the prize ball and the prize ball data. For example, when a prize is won in a prize opening with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls is given to the enclosed gaming machine. Further, the game value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball and the prize ball data, and may be any one corresponding to the prize ball and the prize ball data.

Further, when the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit manages the game medium management device, the game medium management device has a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is an external device (not shown). It is connected to the two-way communication function via a game medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium necessary for the player to perform a game medium lending operation (that is, a game medium loading operation). The operation of paying out the game medium (that is, the payout of the game medium to the player when the winning combination related to the payout of the game medium is won (the winning combination is established), and the necessary game medium is provided on the line. The operation of acquiring the game) or the operation of electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game may be performed. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko gaming machine based on, for example, the management result of the number of game media. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operating means, a return (settlement) operating means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operating means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the game medium corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. In addition, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko game machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachislot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can it be reduced, but it can also prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches a gaming ball as a gaming medium from above with respect to the gaming area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. In this way, since the game ball as a game medium is launched from above with respect to the game area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of gaming balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the gaming machine. Further, without providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game machine and a taking-in mechanism for taking the game ball polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game ball are provided. May be good. In this case, the capture mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to capture, or may be configured to capture from a winning opening provided in the game area.

In the enclosed gaming machine, since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the gaming ball is not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining a possession ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. In addition, as the game balls pass through each winning opening or the like provided in the game area, the number of balls held is increased by paying out the number according to the conditions set according to the winning opening. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game medium management device. Further, for example, when the game is completed, the entire game value (that is, the ball held) stored in the enclosed gaming machine is settled, or a part of the ball held is transmitted to the game medium management device. When all or part of the balls held is integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed gaming machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held decreases. .. Furthermore, there is no concept of a foul ball in a type of gaming machine in which a gaming ball is launched from above the gaming area, but a foul ball is generated when a gaming ball is launched from below as in a conventional gaming machine. sell. Therefore, in the case of a gaming machine in which a gaming ball is launched from below, the number of balls held increases or decreases depending on whether or not a foul ball is generated. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent out and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game medium" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. In addition, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the upper part of the game machine, and receives a request for conversion (ball lending) from the game value managed by the game medium management device to a ball held (ball lending) and counting (return) of the ball held. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game medium management device. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. In the second embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening detection by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to the liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine or the like.

The enclosed gaming machine may be configured so that the player cannot touch the gaming ball. For example, the enclosed gaming machine is of a type in which the gaming ball is circulated only by the gaming machine without being circulated by the island equipment. , And the type in which the game ball circulates in the island equipment but the player cannot touch the game ball is also included in the enclosed game machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is used as a transmission source and the other is used as a transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. It can be confirmed that the signal has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device.

Further, in the game system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set in addition to the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the source.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is confirmed not only that the normal signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the normal signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities. Further, instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the game medium management device by communication, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the game medium management device, and the main control circuit is connected to the main control circuit via the frame control circuit. The game medium management device may be connected by communication. Further, a launch control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, the error control of the main control circuit and the launch control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at the symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate the jackpot symbol. Process so that there is nothing to do.

More specifically, if the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, and one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the other Control is performed to forcibly stop the special symbol of the above with a symbol combination showing a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the jackpot symbol, the general gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state as described above. In this jackpot gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the start of the second special symbol None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the general game The timekeeping of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted based on the transition from the state to the small hit gaming state (stopped at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol), and the transition from the small hit gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the end of the small hit game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the small hit gaming state as described above. In this small hit gaming state, the start condition of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed, if one of the special symbols stops at the symbol combination indicating the small hit symbol, the main CPU is in the variable display. Regarding the other special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol composed of the LED group is performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the timing of the fluctuation time is interrupted as described above.

[4. Game device]
Next, a gaming device applicable to the first to third pachinko gaming machines as long as there is no contradiction will be described. The gaming device described in the present embodiment includes a sensor holding member 3100, a ball entry port member 3200, a plurality of ball entry port members 3300, a distribution member 3400, a variable ball entry port member 3500, a holding means 3600, and a first effect, which will be described later. Member 3700, 2nd effect member 3800, distribution device 4100, return ball prevention structure 4200, movable decorative member 4300, painted decorative member 4400, internal ball flow path 4500, ball flow passage 4600, mounting structure 4700, ball entry device 4800, guidance A part 4900, a third effect member 5100, a fourth effect member 5200, a fifth effect member 5300, a decorative member 5400, a movable body decorative member 5500, a sixth effect member 5600, a seventh effect member 5700, and a protruding decorative member 5800 are included. ..
In the following description of the gaming device, unless otherwise provided, the front-back direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction are the directions indicated by the arrows in the directions shown in FIG.
Further, in the following description, the game panel 100 functions as an example of a passing area through which the game medium can pass. Further, the gaming device is an example of a protruding member provided in the passing region and projecting in a predetermined direction. Further, in the following, an example of applying the gaming device to a pachinko gaming machine in which the gaming medium is a gaming ball will be described, but as long as there is no contradiction, the gaming device may be applied to a pachislot gaming machine in which the gaming medium is a coin. Is possible.

[Sensor holding member 3100]
FIG. 81 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the sensor holding member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 82 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the sensor holding member when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. In FIGS. 81 and 82, the game panel 100 schematically shows a portion of the game area 105 to which the sensor holding member 3100 is attached in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

The sensor holding member 3100 is an example of a detecting means holding member, and is attached from the front side to the game area 105 of the game panel 100 as a game board in which the game area 105 on which the game ball rolls is formed. A passing gate switch 1127, which is an example of the detecting means for detecting, is held. The sensor holding member 3100 is made of a translucent material and includes a base 3110, a detecting means holding portion 3120, and an guiding portion 3130.
In the following description, an example in which the sensor holding member 3100 holds the passing gate switch 1127 will be described, but the detection means held by the sensor holding member 3100 are the first starting port switch 1121 and the second starting port switch 1141. , Count switch 1132, general winning opening switch 1123, and the like.

The base 3110 is formed in a plate shape and is attached to the game panel 100 from the front side. The outer edge of the base 3110 is chamfered. As a result, when the game ball rolling in the game area 105 comes into contact with the base 3110, the game ball can be smoothly parried.

The base 3110 has a shaft-shaped protrusion 3111 that protrudes from the surface (rear surface) facing the game panel 100 to the game panel 100 side (rear surface side), and a fastener 3140 for attaching the sensor holding member 3100 to the game panel 100. A through hole 3112 through which (for example, a screw having no translucency) penetrates, a detection means insertion portion 3113 through which the passage gate switch 1127 is inserted, and a holding portion 3114 holding the rear end of the passage gate switch 1127. To be equipped with. The holding portion 3114 is formed with a claw portion 3114a extending toward the rear surface side in the vicinity of the detecting means insertion portion 3113 and engaging with the rear end of the passing gate switch 1127.

The detection means holding portion 3120 extends forward from the front surface of the base 3110 and is formed at a position corresponding to the detection means insertion portion 3113 to form an entry port 3121 in which a game ball that has rolled in the game area 105 can enter. , The portion of the passage gate switch 1127 that detects the passage of the game ball (the portion in which the circular through hole is formed) is held in the game area 105.

The guide portion 3130 extends forward from the front surface of the base 3110, has an inclined surface 3131 that is inclined downward from the detection means holding portion 3120 side in the left-right direction below the detecting means holding portion 3120, and has passed through the passage gate switch 1127. Guide the game ball in either the left or right direction.

The game panel 100 is provided with a fastening portion 3151, an insertion portion 3152, and a detection means insertion portion 3153 at a portion where the sensor holding member 3100 is attached in the game area 105.

The fastening portion 3151 is a screw hole provided at a position corresponding to the through hole 3112 of the sensor holding member 3100, and engages with the fastener 3140 penetrating the through hole 3112.

The insertion portion 3152 is a hole provided at a position corresponding to the protrusion 3111 of the sensor holding member 3100 and having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 3111, and the protrusion 3111 is inserted. Will be done.

The detection means insertion portion 3153 is provided at a position corresponding to the detection means insertion portion 3113 of the sensor holding member 3100, and the rear end side of the passing gate switch 1127 held by the detection means holding portion 3120 is inserted.

The inner diameter of the fastening portion 3151 and the inner diameter of the insertion portion 3152 are different in dimensions from each other. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the inner diameter of the insertion portion 3152 is larger than the dimension of the inner diameter of the fastening portion 3151.

According to such a sensor holding member 3100, the sensor holding member 3100 which is arranged in the game area 105 and projects to the front side can be attached from the front side of the game panel 100. Here, various devices for controlling the game machine are arranged on the rear surface side of the game panel 100, and the space for installing the devices is limited. According to the present embodiment, by attaching the sensor holding member 3100 from the front side of the game panel 100, the degree of freedom in the position where the sensor holding member 3100 is installed can be improved.

Further, since the sensor holding member 3100 holding the detecting means has a guiding portion 3130 that guides the game ball that has passed through the detecting means in either the left or right direction, the sensor holding member 3100 has passed through the detecting means without providing a separate guiding portion. It becomes possible to further roll the game ball. Further, by attaching the sensor holding member 3100 to the game panel 100 by the light-transmitting protrusion 3111 in addition to the fastener 3140, the number of fasteners 3140 is suppressed and the protrusion is inconspicuous because it has light-transmitting property. The unit 3111 can be securely fixed to the game panel 100. Further, in the game panel 100, the inner diameter of the fastening portion 3151 that engages with the fastener 3140 and the inner diameter of the insertion portion 3152 into which the protruding portion 3111 is inserted have different dimensions. The mounting position of the sensor holding member 3100 can be easily aligned.
Further, by having the guiding portion 3130, the speed at which the game ball passing through the detecting means moves in the vertically downward direction is changed, and the rolling range can be changed in the diagonally downward direction, thereby preventing chattering in the detecting means. At the same time, it becomes possible to roll the game ball to the course to be guided.
Further, by decorating the front side portion of the detecting means holding portion 3120 with a seal or embossing, the detecting means cannot be visually recognized, and the peripheral portion of the detecting means is arranged on the rear surface side due to translucency. The members and the like may be visible.

[Inlet member 3200]
FIG. 83 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the ball entrance member, which is an example of the game device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. In FIG. 83, the game panel 100 schematically shows a portion to which the ball entrance member 3200 is attached in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. In FIG. 83, the dotted line indicates a hidden line.

The ball entry port member 3200 is an example of a receiving member, and is attached to the game panel 100 to provide a ball entry port 3201 which is made of a translucent material and allows a game ball rolling in the game area 105 to enter. It has a ball entry portion 3210, a guide passage 3220, and a protrusion 3230.

The ball entry portion 3210 extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 100 and forms a ball entry port 3201 in the game area 105.

The guidance passage 3220 extends in the vertical direction and is formed in a tubular shape to guide the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 3201. Specifically, in the guidance passage 3220, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 3201 flows down inside, and the game ball is discharged to the rear surface side of the game panel 100. In the guidance passage 3220, if it is possible to visually recognize how the ball enters the entry port 3201 and the game ball passes through, the guidance passage 3220 may be entirely arranged in front of the game panel 100, or may be arranged in the front-rear direction. Only the portion may be arranged on the front surface of the game panel 100, and the other portions may be arranged inside the game panel 100.

The protrusion 3230 is below the ball entry port 3201 of the ball entry portion 3210, and is provided on the lower end side of the guidance passage 3220. It is formed. That is, the protrusion 3230 can guide the game ball that has not entered the ball entry port 3201 to the left or right.

According to such a ball entry port member 3200, by making it possible to visually recognize the place where the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 3201 is guided, it is recognized that the game ball has entered the ball entry port 3201. It becomes possible to make it easier. Further, by providing the protrusions 3230 having slopes on the left and right at the lower part of the ball entry port 3201, the game ball that has rolled from the left and right collides with the protrusions 3230 and is repelled in the direction away from the ball entry port 3201. It is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling in front of the guidance passage 3220 where the ball enters the entry port 3201 and the state in which the game ball passes can be visually recognized, and the visibility of the state in which the game ball passes is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the game ball has entered the ball entry port 3201.
In addition, by providing LED decorations on the guide passage 3220 or the rear portion of the protrusion 3230, the visibility of the place where the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 3201 is guided is further enhanced, and the effect of winning the ball entry port 3201 The effect may be improved.
Further, by providing the deceleration rib in the guide passage 3220 or the protrusion 3230, it may be easy to grasp where the game ball is guided, and the effect of the effect may be improved.

[Multiple entry port members 3300]
FIG. 84 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a plurality of ball entrance members, which is an example of a game device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the forward direction. In FIG. 84, the dotted line indicates a hidden line.

The plurality of ball entrance members 3300 is an example of a plurality of receiving members, which are formed of a translucent material, have a rear surface side attached to the front surface side of the game panel 100 (see FIG. 4), and have a game area 105 (see FIG. 4). ), It has a plurality of entry ports 3301 capable of entering a game ball, and includes a plurality of entry portions 3310 and a confluence 3320.

The ball entry portion 3310 extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 100 and forms a ball entry port 3301 in the game area 105.

In the communication flow path 3320, an internal space 3321 that communicates with the ball entry ports 3301 of the plurality of ball entry portions 3310 is formed, a downwardly inclined inclined surface 3322 is formed on the bottom surface of the internal space 3321, and a downwardly inclined inclined surface 3322 is formed at the lowermost portion of the inclined surface 3322. , A discharge port 3323 is formed to discharge the game ball that has flowed into the internal space 3321 to the outside.

The discharge port 3323 is provided with a general winning port switch 123. The general winning opening switch 123 detects a game ball that has entered from the entry opening 3301 and has circulated in the internal space 3321. The main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) and the payout / launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6) pay out a predetermined number (for example, 4) of prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the general winning opening switch 123. Take control.
That is, it is possible to give the same prize ball to the game balls that have entered the ball entrances 3301 of the plurality of ball entry members 3300.

According to such a plurality of entry port members 3300, a confluence 3320 is provided in which the game balls that have entered each of the plurality of entry ports 3301 merge, and the game balls that have flowed through the confluence 3320 are detected. Compared with the case where the general winning opening switch 123 and the guide passage are provided for each of the plurality of entry openings 3301, the number of parts can be reduced, and the number of assembly work steps and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, because it is made of a translucent material, the state of the game ball flowing through the confluence 3320 can be visually recognized, and it is possible to recognize that the same prize ball is played at all the entry ports 3301. can.

By forming the plurality of ball entry port members 3300 with a translucent material, for example, they are provided in the vicinity of the out port 178 (see FIG. 4) provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 105 (see FIG. 4). As a result, the ball enters the plurality of entry ports 3301 and flows down the game area 105 without entering the game ball flowing through the confluence 3320 and the game area 105 without entering the plurality of entry ports 3301 and enters the out port 178. Since the game balls can be visually recognized at the same time, it is difficult to recognize which of the winning and non-winning game balls is more, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest.
Further, the structure may be such that a general winning opening switch can be installed directly under the plurality of entering openings 3301 so that the number of winnings for each of the plurality of entering openings 3301 can be grasped. ..
Further, by providing a deceleration rib inside the plurality of ball entry port members 3300 or by providing an illumination substrate, it may be easy to grasp where the game ball is guided and the effect of the effect may be improved.

[Distribution member 3400]
85 and 86 are examples of perspective views showing the inside of a sorting member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction.

The distribution member 3400 is attached to the game panel 100 (see FIG. 4), has a ball entry port 3401 in which a game ball rolling in the game area 105 (see FIG. 4) can enter, and is used in the game medium passage. It is provided with an entry ball passage 3410, a distribution ball passage 3420, and an opening / closing portion 3430, which are examples, and distributes a game ball that has entered the ball entry port 3401. For example, the sorting member 3400 can be applied in place of the V winning device 2150 (see FIG. 60).

The ball entry passage 3410 has a ball entry port 3401, forms a passage extending in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 3401 backward.

The distribution ball passage 3420 is connected to the rear end of the entry ball passage 3410, forms a passage extending in the left-right direction around the portion connected to the entry ball passage 3410, and a specific area in the passage extending in the right direction. 3421 is formed, and a normal region 3422 is formed to the left. In the distribution ball passage 3420, a slit 3423 formed in an arc shape that bulges downward through the displacement portion 3431 described later is formed in the rear wall of the portion connected to the entry ball passage 3410.

The specific area 3421 is an area in which the player is in an advantageous state when the game ball passes through, and has the same function as the V winning opening 2155 (see FIG. 60), and the V winning opening switch 2156 (FIG. 61). See). Further, the normal region 3422 has the same function as the loss opening 2157 (see FIG. 60), unlike the specific region 3421.

The opening / closing unit 3430 includes a displacement unit 3431 and a drive unit 3432. The displacement portion 3431 is a shaft member having a plane 3431a from the rear side of the distribution ball passage 3420, penetrates the slit 3423, extends into the distribution ball passage 3420, and rotates along the slit 3423. By rotating, the opening / closing portion 3430 can be displaced into a state in which the specific area 3421 is closed and the plane 3431a is inclined to the normal area 3422, and a state in which the normal area 3422 is closed and the plane 3431a is inclined to the specific area 3421. .. The displacement portion 3431 is visible from the front side via the ball entry passage 3410.

The drive unit 3432 rotates the displacement unit 3431 along the slit 3423, and is composed of, for example, a solenoid, a gear, or the like. ) Is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 86, in a state where the plane 3431a is inclined to the normal area 3422 (the state where the displacement portion 3431 is moved to the right side of the slit 3423) by closing the specific area 3421, the game ball guided from the ball entry passage 3410 is , Abuts on the plane 3431a and is guided to the normal region 3422.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 85, in a state where the normal region 3422 is closed and the plane 3431a is inclined to the specific region 3421 (the displacement portion 3431 is moved to the left side of the slit 3423), the game guided from the ball entry passage 3410. The sphere abuts on the plane 3431a and is guided to the specific region 3421.

FIG. 87 is an example of a side view of a distribution member which is an example of a game device. In FIG. 87, the dotted line indicates a hidden line.
The bottom surface of the distribution ball passage 3420 is arranged at a position lower than the bottom surface of the entry ball passage 3410. The lowermost portion of the slit 3423 of the distribution ball passage 3420 (the central portion of the arc that bulges downward) is also arranged at a position lower than the bottom surface of the entry ball passage 3410. Therefore, when the displacement portion 3431 is located at the lowermost portion of the slit 3423, it is arranged at a position lower than the bottom surface of the entry ball passage 3410, and even if the game ball flows from the entry ball passage 3410 in this state, the displacement portion 3431 is displaced. The unit 3431 does not block the game ball, and it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring inside the distribution member 3400.

By forming the entry ball passage 3410 and the distribution ball passage 3420 with a translucent material, and forming the displacement portion 3431 with a material having no translucency, the displacement portion 3431 can be viewed from the front side. Since the position can be easily visually recognized and the specific area 3421, which is one of the left and right routes, can be visually recognized, it is possible to determine whether or not the player will be in an advantageous state after guiding the game ball from the entry ball passage 3410. It becomes possible to make it easy to recognize.

According to such a distribution member 3400, the flat surface 3431a provided on the rear side of the ball entry passage 3410 that guides the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 3401 from the front side to the rear side rotates to form a specific region. It can be displaced into a state in which the plane 3431a is inclined to the normal region 3422 with the 3421 closed, and a state in which the plane 3431a is inclined to the specific region 3421 with the normal region 3422 closed. As a result, the game ball guided from the ball entry passage 3410 can be guided to either the specific area 3421 or the normal area 3422 by the plane 3431a.
When the game ball is inserted into the specific area 3421 during the big hit game, the game state in which the probability change control is executed after the big hit game (for example, the above-mentioned high-accuracy time-shortening game state and high-accuracy non-time-saving game) State). Alternatively, in the case of a 1-kind 2-kind mixer (for example, the above-mentioned third pachinko gaming machine), when a game ball is inserted into a specific area 3421 in a small hit gaming state, it is possible to shift to a big hit gaming state. It will be possible.
Further, the shape of the displacement portion 3431 is not limited to the shape described above, and may be a cylindrical shape, a fan shape, a dish shape, or the like.
Further, by providing a deceleration rib or an illuminated substrate in the ball entry passage 3410 and the distribution ball passage 3420, it is easy to grasp where the game ball is guided, and the effect of the effect can be improved. good.

[Variable ball entrance member 3500]
88 and 89 are examples of perspective views showing the appearance of a variable entrance member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above left in the forward direction. In FIGS. 88 and 89, the game panel 100 schematically shows a portion to which the variable entrance member 3500 is attached in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

The variable ball entry port member 3500 is an example of a variable opening / closing member, which is provided on the game panel 100 and has a door 3510 for opening / closing the ball entry port 3501. For example, the variable entrance member 3500 can be applied instead of the special electric accessory unit 130 (see FIG. 4).

The door 3510 is rotated from the state where the ball entry port 3501 is closed to the front side by a driving means (for example, a solenoid, a gear, etc.) with one end side (for example, the lower end side) as a rotation axis, and the door 3510 is rotated to the front side. In the open state, for example, it has the same function as the special electric accessory 133 (see FIG. 4), and the opening and closing is controlled by the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6).

The door 3510 has a notch 3511 formed at a corner on the other end side (for example, the upper end side) so as to penetrate from the front side to the entrance of the ball in a closed state. For example, when a ball is clogged inside the ball entry port 3501, as shown in FIG. 88, a rod-shaped jig P is inserted into the ball entry port 3501 through the notch 3511 to insert the rod-shaped jig P inside the ball entry port 3501. It is possible to eliminate the ball clogging.

A slope 3511a is formed on the side edge of the notch 3511 from the rear to the front. By forming the slope 3511a, as shown in FIG. 89, when the game ball collides with the notch 3511 while the door 3510 is open or is about to open, the game ball is smoothly parried downward. Can be done.

According to the variable ball entry port member 3500, by forming a notch 3511 in a part of the door 3510 that opens and closes the ball entry port 3501, a jig P is inserted into the notch 3511 portion to open the door 3510 at the time of maintenance. It becomes possible to make it. Further, since the side edge of the notch 3511 of the door 3510 forms a downward slope 3511a, it is possible to guide the game ball downward when the game ball hits the side edge of the notch 3511 of the door 3510. It becomes.
Further, the shape of the notch 3511 of the door 3510 is triangular, but the shape is not limited to this and may be circular or the like.
Further, by providing the variable ball entry port member 3500 with a deceleration rib or an illumination substrate, it may be easy to grasp where the game ball is guided, and the effect of the effect may be improved.
Further, the door 3510 has the same function as the special electric accessory 133 (see FIG. 4), but is not limited to this, and may have the same function as the ordinary electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), for example.

[Holding means 3600]
FIG. 90 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the holding means, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally upward left in the rear direction. In FIG. 90, the game panel 100 schematically shows a portion to which the holding means 3600 is attached in a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. In FIG. 90, the dotted line indicates a hidden line.

The holding means 3600 inserts the detecting means 3602 for detecting the game ball into a predetermined position (for example, the ball entry port 3601) on the rear surface side of the game panel 100, which is an example of a member to which the holding means 3600 is attached. Hold the sphere in a detectable position). The holding means 3600 is, for example, a first starting port switch 121, a second starting port switch 141A, 141B, a passing gate switch 127, and a big hit winning opening count switch 132 shown in FIG. 6, which is an example of the detecting means 3602. , The general winning opening switch 123, the small winning large winning opening count switch 152, and the like can be used to hold the general winning opening switch 123 at a predetermined position.

The holding means 3600 includes a main body 3610, a plurality of fixing portions 3620, and a cable holding portion 3630.

The main body 3610 is formed, for example, in a box shape, a storage hole 3611 for accommodating the detection means 3602 is formed on the front side, and a cable penetration portion 3612 through which the cable 3602a extending from the detection means 3602 can penetrate is formed on the side surface. ..

The fixing portion 3620 is fixed to the side surface of the main body 3610, abuts on the rear surface of the game panel 100, and engages with a fixing member 3640 (for example, a screw or the like) for fixing the fixing portion 3620 to the rear surface of the game panel 100. It has a member engaging portion 3621. The fixing member engaging portion 3621 is formed of a hole through which the fixing member 3640 is inserted, for example, if the fixing member 3640 is a screw.

The cable holding portion 3630 extends from the side surface of the main body 3610 along the rear surface of the game panel 100 at a position away from the rear surface of the game panel 100, which is an example of a member to which the holding means 3600 is attached, and is connected to the fixing portion 3620. ing. As a result, a hole 3631 is formed by the side surface of the main body 3610, the rear surface of the game panel 100, the front surface of the cable holding portion 3630, and the side surface of the fixing portion 3620, and the cable 3602a extending from the detection means 3602 is passed through the hole 3631. As a result, the cable holding portion 3630 holds the cable 3602a extending from the detecting means 3602 in the vicinity of the main body 3610.

According to such a holding means 3600, since the cable 3602a extending from the detecting means 3602 can be put together by the cable holding portion 3630, the cable 3602a extending from the detecting means 3602 does not get in the way during the assembly work, and other cables are not obstructed. Since the possibility of hooking the cable on the member and causing the wire to break can be reduced, the work efficiency can be improved.

[1st production member 3700]
FIG. 91 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the first effect member, which is an example of the game device, when viewed from the front. FIG. 91 (a) shows the initial state of the first effect member, and FIG. 91 (b) shows the moving state which is the state after the movement of the first effect member.
FIG. 92 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the holding means, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. In FIG. 92, the dotted line indicates a hidden line.
FIG. 93 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the holding means, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 91, the first effect member 3700 has a base portion 3710, a first movable portion 3720 that moves in a predetermined direction (upward in the example shown in FIG. 91) with respect to the base portion 3710, and a first movable portion. It includes a second movable portion 3730 that rotates with respect to the first movable portion 3720 while moving in a predetermined direction along with the portion 3720, and a drive unit 3740 (see FIG. 92) that moves the first movable portion 3720. The first effect member 3700 is arranged in an overlapping state in the order of the first movable portion 3720, the second movable portion 3730, and the base portion 3710 from the front side to the rear side, and is driven by the drive unit 3740 to be driven by FIG. 91 (a). ) Is transformed into the moving state shown in FIG. 91 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the base portion 3710 is formed of a plate material formed in a predetermined shape (oval shape in the example shown in FIGS. 92 and 93) when viewed from the front surface, and is formed by another pachinko gaming machine. It is fixed to a member (for example, a game panel 100, which is not shown).

The base portion 3710 has a first regulating section 3711 and a pair of second regulating sections 3712. The first regulating portion 3711 is a through hole through which the shaft member 3722 of the first movable portion 3720, which will be described later, penetrates and extends in a predetermined direction, and regulates the moving direction of the first movable portion 3720. The second regulating portion 3712 is a through hole through which the protruding portion 3732 of the second movable portion 3730, which will be described later, penetrates and extends in a predetermined direction, and then extends in a direction different from the predetermined direction. regulate.

The first movable portion 3720 has a decorative portion 3721 formed of a plate material formed into a predetermined shape (although it can have an arbitrary shape, but in the example shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, it has an elliptical shape) when viewed from the front surface. The shaft member 3722, which is a rod-shaped body extending rearward from the rear surface of the decorative portion 3721, and a pair of shaft portions 3723, which are rod-shaped bodies extending rearward from the rear surface of the decorative portion 3721, are provided.

The second movable portion 3730 is provided in a pair of decorative portions 3731 formed of plate materials formed in a predetermined shape when viewed from the front surface and a pair of decorative portions 3731, respectively, and is a rod-shaped body extending rearward from the rear surface of the decorative portion 3731. It is provided with a pair of protruding portions 3732 and a pair of through holes 3733 provided in the pair of decorative portions 3731 and through which the pair of shaft portions 3723 of the first movable portion 3720 can be rotatably inserted. The pair of decorative portions 3731 are formed in a shape that is symmetrical with each other when viewed from the front surface. The pair of protrusions 3732 and the pair of through holes 3733 are arranged at positions symmetrical with each other when viewed from the front surface.

The decorative portion 3731 may have an arbitrary shape, but in the examples shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the decorative portion 3731 is formed in an arc shape, and a slit is formed in a portion of the first movable portion 3720 that serves as a movement path for the shaft member 3722. It is formed, and a notch is provided below the pair of through holes 3733 (a portion where the pair of decorative portions 3731 interfere with each other during rotation). As shown in FIG. 91 (b), the pair of decorative portions 3731 rotate in opposite directions with the pair of through holes 3733 as rotation axes. At this time, by providing a notch below the pair of through holes 3733 of the pair of decorative portions 3731, it is possible to prevent the pair of decorative portions 3731 from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIG. 92, the shaft member 3722 of the first movable portion 3720 passes through the slit of the pair of decorative portions 3731 of the second movable portion 3730 and the first regulating portion 3711 of the base portion 3710, and is rear of the base portion 3710. It protrudes to the side and extends. The shaft member 3722 is provided with a retaining stopper on the rear side of the base portion 3710 so that it cannot be slidably removed from the first regulating portion 3711. The shaft member 3722 is in contact with the outer periphery of the cam 3471 of the drive unit 3740 on the rear side of the base portion 3710.

The pair of shaft portions 3723 of the first movable portion 3720 are rotatably engaged with the pair of through holes 3733 of the second movable portion 3730, respectively. The pair of protruding portions 3732 of the second movable portion 3730 protrudes to the rear side of the base portion 3710 through the pair of second restricting portions 3712 of the base portion 3710, respectively, and a retaining stopper is attached so that the second restricting portion can slide freely. It is designed so that it does not come out of the part 3712.

The drive unit 3740 includes a cam 3741 having a major axis portion and a minor axis portion, and a drive means (for example, a motor or the like) 3742 for rotating the cam 3471. The driving means 3742 is driven by, for example, the control of the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6).

The first effect member 3700 is in the state shown in FIG. 92 in the initial state, and the shaft member 3722 of the first movable portion 3720 is in contact with the outer circumference of the short diameter portion of the cam 3471 of the drive portion 3740.
Then, when the first effect member 3700 is rotated so that the major axis portion of the cam 3471 comes upward by the drive of the drive means 3742 based on the control of the accessory control circuit 307, the first movable portion 3720 The shaft member 3722 is pushed upward. Then, the first effect member 3700 moves in a predetermined direction (upward in the example shown in FIG. 92) along the first regulation unit 3711. Further, when the first effect member 3700 moves in a predetermined direction, the second movable portion 3730 also moves in a predetermined direction along the second regulating portion 3712. Then, when the protruding portion 3732 moves to a portion extending in a direction different from the predetermined direction of the second regulating portion 3712, the second movable portion 3730 rotates about the shaft portion 3723 of the first movable portion 3720. As a result, the first effect member 3700 is in the moving state shown in FIG. 91 (b).

According to such a first effect member 3700, the first movable portion 3720 is simply moved in a predetermined direction, and the second movable portion 3730 is moved around the central axis of rotation without using a power member such as a motor. Since it is possible to perform complicated operations such as rotating while rotating, it is possible to produce a more advanced effect while reducing the number of members.
Further, the shapes of the first regulation unit 3711 and the second regulation unit 3712 are linear and polygonal lines, but the shape is not limited to this and may be a curved shape.

[Second production member 3800]
94 and 95 are examples of perspective views showing the appearance of the second effect member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 94 shows an initial state of the second effect member 3800, and FIG. 95 shows a moving state of the second effect member 3800 after the movement.

The second effect member 3800 includes a base shaft 3810, a movable portion 3820 rotatably supported by the base shaft 3810, and a position detection unit 3830.

The base shaft 3810 includes a base shaft 3811 and a base tooth portion 3812. The base shaft 3811 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is fixed to another member (not shown) of the pachinko gaming machine. The base tooth portion 3812 is fixed to a base shaft 3811 extending in a predetermined direction, extends in a predetermined direction, and a plurality of teeth arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the base shaft 3811 are formed on the outer periphery.

The movable portion 3820 includes a movable base 3821, a drive portion 3822, a movable shaft 3823, a decorative portion 3824, and a grip portion 3825.

The movable base 3821 is rotatably attached to the base shaft 3810 about the base shaft 3811.

The drive unit 3822 is attached to the movable base 3821, and has, for example, a drive means (for example, a motor or the like) that is driven by the control of the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6).

The movable shaft 3823 extends from the drive portion 3822 and extends in a direction orthogonal to the base tooth portion 3812, and a spiral-shaped movable tooth 3823a is formed on the outer periphery thereof. The movable tooth 3823a meshes with the base tooth portion 3812 of the base shaft 3810. Further, the movable shaft 3823 is rotated about the axis of the movable shaft 3823 by the drive unit 3822.

The decorative portion 3824 is attached to the movable base 3821 and is formed in an arbitrary shape such as a character, a graphic character, or a character (in the example shown in FIG. 94, a shape imitating 7) so as to be visible to the player. Be placed.

The grip portion 3825 is attached to the tip of the movable shaft 3823, and for example, the movable shaft 3823 can be rotated by being gripped and rotated by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, when the position of the movable portion 3820 with respect to the base shaft 3810 deviates from the proper position based on the control of the accessory control circuit 307, the manager of the pachinko gaming machine rotates the grip portion 3825 to rotate the base shaft 3810. It is possible to adjust the positional deviation of the movable portion 3820 with respect to the above.

The position detecting unit 3830 includes position detecting means 3831a, 3831b, 3831c and a detected unit 3832.

The position detecting means 3831a, 3831b, and 3831c are provided on the outer periphery of the base shaft 3811 and are arranged in the rotation direction of the movable portion 3820 (circumferential direction of the base shaft 3811). When the proximity of is detected, a signal is output to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). The number of position detecting means is not limited to three, and may be two or four or more depending on the movable range of the movable portion 3820 and the like.

The detected portion 3832 is a protrusion that projects in the direction of the base shaft 3811 at a portion of the movable portion 3820 near the outer circumference of the base shaft 3811 (the tip portion of the drive portion 3822 in the example shown in FIGS. 94 and 95). The plurality of position detecting means 3831a, 3831b, and 3831c are arranged on a locus through which the detected portion 3832 passes when the movable portion 3820 rotates.

In the initial state of the second effect member 3800 shown in FIG. 94, the detected unit 3832 is in close proximity to the position detecting means 3831a. In this state, the position detecting means 3831a outputs a signal to the accessory control circuit 307. Further, in the moving state of the second effect member 3800 shown in FIG. 95, the detected unit 3832 is close to the position detecting means 3831c. In this state, the position detecting means 3831c outputs a signal to the accessory control circuit 307.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of position detecting means 3831a, 3831b, 3831c are provided on the base shaft 3810, and a detected portion 3832 is provided on the movable portion 3820, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of position detecting means 3831a, 3831b are provided. , 3831c may be provided on the movable portion 3820, and the detected portion 3832 may be provided on the base shaft 3810.

In the second effect member 3800, the movable shaft 3823 is rotated by the drive of the drive unit 3822 based on the control of the accessory control circuit 307 from the initial state shown in FIG. 94. Then, the movable portion 3820 rotates about the base shaft 3811 of the base shaft 3810. As a result, the decorative portion 3824 arranged at a position visible to the player rotates about the base shaft 3811 (in the examples shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the decorative portion 3824 moves from the initial state to the moving state. As a result, the decorative portion 3824 falls down toward the front side and is turned upside down.), And the moving state shown in FIG. 95 is obtained.

According to such a second effect member 3800, the movable portion 3820 that rotates around the base shaft 3811 of the base shaft 3810 is provided with a drive portion 3822 for rotating the movable portion 3820, and is movable by the drive portion 3822. By rotating the movable shaft 3823 of the portion 3820, the movable portion 3820 is rotated about the base shaft 3811. Therefore, as compared with the case where a rotation shaft for rotating the drive unit and the movable portion is provided and the rotation shaft is rotated to rotate the movable portion, the load due to the weight of the movable portion on the rotating shaft can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to rotate a larger movable portion.

Further, according to the second effect member 3800, the detected portion 3832 is detected by the movable position (for example, the position detecting means 3831c) from the initial position (for example, the position where the detected portion 3832 is detected by the position detecting means 3831a). The movable portion 3820 that rotates to the position) may not return to an appropriate initial position when the operation is repeated. In such a case, the movable portion 3820 can be returned to an appropriate position by rotating the movable shaft 3823 by the grip portion 3825.

Further, according to the second effect member 3800, the position detection is arranged on either the base shaft 3810 or the movable portion 3820 in the rotation direction of the movable portion 3820 and detects the position of the movable portion 3820 with respect to the reference position of the base shaft 3810. Means 3831a, 3831b, 3831c were provided. As a result, a plurality of positions of the movable portion 3820 with respect to the base shaft 3810 can be reliably detected, so that the state of the movable portion 3820 at the plurality of positions can be appropriately managed.
Further, the position detecting means 3831a, 3831b, and 3831c correspond to the case where the movable portion 3820 moves to the standby position, the first movable position, and the second movable position, respectively, and the movable portion 3820 extends over a plurality of stages. It is possible to grasp the position of each movable stage. The position of the movable portion 3820 corresponding to the position detecting means 3831a, 3831b, 3831c may be a position visible or invisible to the player.

[Distributor 4100]
FIG. 96 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the sorting device, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. In FIG. 96, the sorting device 4100 shows a state in which the front cover is removed.

The distribution device 4100 is attached to the game panel 100 (see FIG. 4), has a ball entry port 4101 in which a game ball rolling in the game area 105 (see FIG. 4) can enter, and has a ball entry passage. It is provided with a 4110, a distribution ball passage 4120, and an opening / closing portion 4130, and distributes a game ball that has entered the ball entry port 4101. For example, the sorting member 3400 can be applied in place of the V winning device 2150 (see FIG. 60).

The ball entry passage 4110 has a ball entry port 4101 that penetrates in the vertical direction, and guides the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 4101 to the distribution ball passage 4120 arranged below. Further, in the ball entry passage 4110, an insertion hole 4111 through which the moving member 4131 of the opening / closing portion 4130 described later is inserted is formed on the side wall in the vicinity of the distribution ball passage 4120 arranged below.

The distribution ball passage 4120 has a partition wall 4121 extending in the vertical direction and partitioning the internal space into two spaces on the left and right. On the upper end side of one of the two spaces, a specific area 4122, which is a through hole in the vertical direction and in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry port 4101 can enter, is arranged. On the upper end side of the other of the two spaces, a normal region 4123, which is a through hole in the vertical direction and in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry port 4101 can enter, is arranged.

The specific area 4122 is an area in which the player is in an advantageous state when the game ball passes through, and has the same function as the V winning opening 2155 (see FIG. 60), and the V winning opening switch 2156 (FIG. 61). See). Further, the normal region 4123 has the same function as the loss opening 2157 (see FIG. 60).

At the upper end of the partition wall 4121, an inclined surface 4121a that inclines from the specific area 4122 side toward the normal area 4123 side is formed. As a result, when the specific area 4122 is blocked by the moving member 4131 of the opening / closing portion 4130 described later, the game ball falling from the entry port 4101 can be smoothly guided to the normal area 4123. It becomes.

The opening / closing unit 4130 includes a moving member 4131 and a driving unit 4132. The moving member 4131 changes the specific area 4122 from a state in which the game ball can enter to a state in which the game ball cannot enter. Specifically, the moving member 4131 is arranged on the specific area 4122, and in the insertion hole 4111 of the ball entry passage 4110, the moving member 4131 is in a predetermined direction (in the example shown in FIG. 96, it is the left-right direction and is above the specific area 4122. By moving in the direction of retracting from the top of the specific area 4122), the specific area 4122 is changed from a state in which the game ball can enter (open state) to a state in which the game ball cannot enter (closed state). ..

FIG. 97 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the moving member of the sorting device, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally lower right in the forward direction.
The moving member 4131 has a main body 4131a which is a plate material extending in a predetermined direction (in the example shown in FIG. 96, which is a left-right direction and retracts from above the specific area 4122 and above the specific area 4122), and the tip of the main body 4131a. It has a top portion 4131b formed in the portion and an inclined portion 4131c in the main body 4131a whose width is widened when viewed from above from the top portion 4131b toward the base end side, and the drive unit 4132 is connected to the base end side of the main body 4131a. Has been done.

The inclined portion 4131c is formed with an inclined surface 4131d that is inclined from the edge to the center side from the upper surface to the lower surface of the moving member 4131.

The drive unit 4132 includes a connecting member 4132a rotatably connected to the base end side of the moving member 4131 and a driving means (not shown) for moving the connecting member 4132a in a predetermined direction. The drive means is composed of, for example, a solenoid or the like, and is controlled by the main control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 61) in the same manner as the V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 61).

FIG. 98 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the sorting device, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. In FIG. 98, the sorting device 4100 shows a state in which the front cover is removed.
When the moving member 4131 comes into contact with the game ball when the moving member 4131 moves in order to shift from the open state to the closed state of the specific area 4122, for example, the sorting device 4100 comes into contact with the game ball, as shown in FIG. 98. The inclined surface 4131d of the above comes into contact with the game ball, is guided to the inclined surface 4131d, swings so that the moving member 4131 rides on the game ball, and pushes the game ball into the specific area 4122.

As one aspect of the sorting device 4100, the entry ball passage 4110 and the sorting ball passage 4120 are formed of a material having translucency, and the moving member 4131 is formed of a material having no translucency. The position of the moving member 4131 is easily visible to the player, and the outcome of whether the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 4101 enters the specific area 4122 or the normal area 4123. It becomes easier for the player to see.

According to such a sorting device 4100, the moving member 4131 that moves the specific area 4122 from the state in which the game ball can enter to the state in which it cannot enter by moving in the predetermined direction is an end portion in the predetermined direction. A top portion 4131b formed in the above, and an inclined portion 4131c whose width extends from the top portion 4131b, and the inclined portion 4131c is provided with an inclined surface 4131d which is inclined from the edge to the center side from the upper surface to the lower surface of the moving member 4131. Formed. As a result, the moving member 4131 has a pointed structure, which makes it easier to guide the game ball to the route for guiding the game ball. Since it is possible to avoid being caught between and, it is possible to prevent ball clogging.
When the game ball is inserted into the specific area 4122 during the big hit game, the game state in which the probability change control is executed after the big hit game (for example, the above-mentioned high-accuracy time-shortening game state and high-accuracy non-time-saving game) State). Alternatively, in the case of a 1-kind 2-kind mixer (for example, the above-mentioned third pachinko gaming machine), when a game ball is inserted into a specific area 4122 in a small hit gaming state, it is possible to shift to a big hit gaming state. It will be possible.
Further, the sorting device 4100 may be provided with a deceleration rib or an illuminated substrate to make it easier to grasp where the game ball is guided and to improve the effect of the effect.

[Return ball prevention structure 4200]
99 and 100 are examples of perspective views showing the appearance of the return ball prevention structure, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the forward direction. In FIGS. 99 and 100, the game panel 100 schematically shows a portion to which the return ball prevention structure 4200 is attached in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

The return ball prevention structure 4200 is an example of a return game medium prevention structure, and is an outlet of a launch passage 110a formed between a pair of guide rails 110 through which a game ball launched from a launch device 6 (see FIG. 2) passes. It is provided in the vicinity to allow the game ball to exit from the launch passage 110a (state shown in FIG. 100) and to prevent the game ball from entering the launch passage 110a from the exit (state shown in FIG. 99).
The return ball prevention structure 4200 includes a fixed shaft 4210, a rotating member 4220, and a rotation range regulating member 4230.

The fixed shaft 4210 is a shaft-shaped body that is fixed in the vicinity of the exit of the launch passage 110a on the extension line of the lower guide rail 110 and projects forward from the game panel 100.

The rotating member 4220 is rotatably provided around a fixed shaft 4210, and has a protrusion 4221, a first weight portion 4222, and a second weight portion 4223.

The protrusion 4221 is a plate-like body that stands above the fixed shaft 4210 so as to block the launch passage 110a in the initial state shown in FIG. 99, and the flow of the game ball that emerges from the launch passage 110a at the initial position. Placed on the road.

The first weight portion 4222 is an elliptical columnar body when viewed from the front, the base end of the protrusion 4221 is connected to the upper end side, and the first weight portion 4222 is rotatably attached to the fixed shaft 4210 and is below the fixed shaft 4210. Extends to. The weight of the first weight portion 4222 is heavier than the combined weight of the protrusion 4221 and the second weight portion 4223. As a result, in the initial state (a state in which the launched game balls do not collide), as shown in FIG. 99, the protrusion 4221 is erected to block the launch passage 110a.

The second weight portion 4223 is arranged on the tip end side of the protrusion 4221 and is a triangular columnar body when viewed from the front.

The rotation range regulating member 4230 is a shaft-shaped body provided in pairs on the opposite side of the launch passage 110a with respect to the fixed shaft 4210 and projecting forward from the game panel 100. One of the rotation range regulating members 4230 is provided above the fixed shaft 4210, and as shown in FIG. 100, the protrusion 4221 of the rotated rotation member 4220 abuts, and the launched game ball hits the protrusion 4221. The rotation range of rotation due to collision with is regulated. Further, the other rotation range regulating member 4230 is provided below the fixed shaft 4210, and as shown in FIG. 99, the first weight portion 4222 of the rotated rotation member 4220 abuts and is launched. Restricts the rotation range of rotation that returns to the initial state after rotation due to collision with the protrusion 4221.

According to such a return ball prevention structure 4200, at the initial position, the protrusion 4221 is arranged in the flow path of the game ball due to the weight of the first weight portion 4222. Then, when the game ball that has passed through the launch passage 110a collides with the protrusion 4221, the rotating member 4220 rotates, and the game ball moves to the game area. After that, the protrusion 4221 returns to the initial position due to the weight of the first weight portion 4222. At this time, if the weight difference between the first weight portion 4222 and the protrusion 4221 is large, it may take time to stabilize at the initial position due to a reaction to return to the initial position or the like. According to the return ball prevention structure 4200, the second weight portion 4223 is provided on the tip end side of the protrusion 4221 on the opposite side of the first weight portion 4222 with the fixed shaft 4210 sandwiched between them. The protrusion 4221 that prevents the game ball from entering the launch passage can be returned to the initial position more quickly than when the second weight portion 4223 is not provided, so that the return ball can be prevented more effectively. Is possible.
Further, the first weight portion 4222 has an elliptical columnar body when viewed from the front, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a polygonal column or the like may be used.

[Movable decorative member 4300]
101, 102, and 103 are examples of perspective views showing the appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. In FIGS. 101, 102, and 103, only the outer shape of the decorative member 4324 of the movable decorative member 4300 is shown by a alternate long and short dash line.
FIG. 104 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the decorative member of the movable decorative member 4300 is omitted.

The movable decorative member 4300 includes a base portion 4310, a first accessory 4320, a second accessory 4330, and a drive unit 4340. As shown in FIG. 101, the movable decorative member 4300 rotates only the first accessory 4320 from the state where the base portion 4310, the first accessory 4320 and the second accessory 4330 are overlapped, as shown in FIG. 102. After that, as shown in FIG. 103, the first accessory 4320 and the second accessory 433 rotate together.

FIG. 104 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a movable decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the decorative member of the movable decorative member 4300 is omitted.

The base portion 4310 includes a base member 4311, a rotation shaft 4312, and a drive portion accommodating portion 4313.

The base member 4311 can have any shape, but is, for example, a fan-shaped plate-like body when viewed from the front side, and other members of the pachinko gaming machine (although not shown, for example, the gaming panel 100, etc.). ) Is fixed.

The rotating shaft 4312 is a shaft that is arranged on one end side (right end side in the example shown in FIG. 104) of the base member 4311 and projects from the front surface to the front surface side of the base member 4311.

The drive unit accommodating portion 4313 is arranged on the other end side (left end side in the example shown in FIG. 104) of the base member 4311, and is a through hole that rotatably holds the drive shaft 4341 of the drive unit 4340 described later. be.

The first accessory 4320 is rotatable around a predetermined position (rotating shaft 4312), and is decorated with the first accessory base 4321, the rotating shaft engaging portion 4322, the driving portion engaging portion 4323, and the decoration. A member 4324 (see FIGS. 101, 102 and 103) is provided.

The first accessory base 4321 may have any shape, and is, for example, a fan-shaped plate-like body when viewed from the front side.

The rotation shaft engaging portion 4322 is arranged on one end side (right end side in the example shown in FIG. 104) of the first accessory base 4321, and is a through hole through which the rotation shaft 4312 of the base member 4311 is inserted. be.

The drive unit engaging portion 4323 is arranged on the other end side (left end side in the example shown in FIG. 104) of the first accessory base 4321 and engages with the first engaging portion 4342 of the drive unit 4340 described later. It is a groove to do.

The decorative member 4324 is attached to the front surface of the first accessory base 4321, and although only the outer shape is shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIGS. 101 to 103, the decorative member 4324 is formed in an arbitrary shape such as a character, a graphic character, or a character. ing.

The second accessory 4330 is rotatable about a predetermined position (rotation shaft 4312) and is arranged behind the first accessory 4320, and is arranged with the second accessory base 4331 and the rotation shaft. It includes a joint portion 4332, a drive portion engaging portion 4333, and a decorative member 4334 (see FIGS. 101, 102, and 103).

The second accessory base 4331 can have any shape, and is, for example, a fan-shaped frame when viewed from the front side.

The rotation shaft engaging portion 4332 is arranged on one end side (right end side in the example shown in FIG. 104) of the second accessory base 4331, and is a through hole through which the rotation shaft 4312 of the base member 4311 is inserted. be.

The drive unit engaging portion 4333 is an opening formed inside the second accessory base 4331, and the second engaging portion 4343 of the drive unit 4340, which will be described later, is arranged. The second engaging portion 4343 rotates in the driving portion engaging portion 4333.

The decorative member 4334 is attached to the second accessory base 4331, and although only the outer shape is shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIGS. 101 to 103, the decorative member 4334 is formed in an arbitrary shape such as a character, a graphic character, or a character. ..

The drive unit 4340 includes a drive shaft 4341, a first engagement unit 4342, and a second engagement unit 4343.

The drive shaft 4341 is a cylindrical body that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front surface and rotates around a center line extending in the front-rear direction. ) Is driven by a controlled motor or the like.

The first engaging portion 4342 is a shaft member provided on the front surface of the drive shaft 4341 and projects from the front surface to the front surface side of the second engaging portion 4343. The first engaging portion 4342 engages with the driving portion engaging portion 4323 of the first accessory 4320 and rotates around the drive shaft 4341 to rotate the first accessory 4320.

The second engaging portion 4343 has an arc portion 4343a which is a substantially arc-shaped wall-like body which protrudes from the front surface of the drive shaft 4341 to the front surface and has the same center line as the drive shaft 4341 when viewed from the front surface. The second engaging portion 4343 engages with the driving portion engaging portion 4333 of the second accessory 4330 and rotates around the drive shaft 4341 to rotate the second accessory.

In the movable decorative member 4300, from the state shown in FIG. 101, the drive shaft 4341 rotates to the left side, the first engaging portion 4342 also rotates with the rotation of the drive shaft 4341, and the first engaging portion 4342 It moves in the drive unit engaging portion 4323 of the first accessory 4320. As a result, as shown in FIG. 102, the first accessory 4320 rotates about the rotation shaft 4312 of the base member 4311. On the other hand, in the second accessory 4330, the intermediate portion of the arc portion 4343a of the second engaging portion 4343 rotates while the intermediate portion of the arc portion 4343a of the second engaging portion 4343 abuts on the upper edge of the rotating shaft engaging portion 4332 in the rotating shaft engaging portion 4332. It is in a state of being rotated and has not started to rotate.

After that, the rotation of the drive shaft 4341 progresses, the end portion 4343b of the arc portion 4343a abuts on the upper edge of the rotation shaft engaging portion 4332 of the second engaging portion 4343, and the rotation of the drive shaft 4341 further advances. Then, the end portion 4343b moves downward. Then, along with this, the second accessory 4330 also moves downward due to gravity, rotates around the rotation shaft 4312 of the base member 4311 together with the first accessory 4320, and is in the state shown in FIG. 103.

According to such a movable decorative member 4300, in the drive unit 4340, by rotating around the drive shaft 4341, the first accessory 4320 is rotated by the first engaging portion 4342, and the second engaging portion is used. The second accessory 4330 is rotated by 4343. As a result, it is possible to change the movements of two accessories with one drive unit, and since there are few members to drive, the number of assembly man-hours and the number of parts can be reduced, and the amount of assembly work and manufacturing cost can be suppressed. Is possible.

Further, according to the movable decorative member 4300, the first accessory 4320 rotates about the rotation shaft 4312, while the second accessory 4330 rotates while in contact with the intermediate portion of the arc portion 4343a. The second engaging portion 4343 rotates about the drive shaft 4341 without moving, and when it comes into contact with the end portion 4343b of the arc portion 4343a, it rotates about the rotation shaft 4312. As a result, it is possible to make the two accessories have different operation modes with one drive unit, and since there are few members for driving, the assembly man-hours and the number of parts can be reduced, and the assembly work amount and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. It is possible to suppress the problem and to diversify the production mode.

[Painted decorative member 4400]
FIG. 105 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a painted decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction.

The paint decorative member 4400 includes a base member 4410 and a base member 4420.
The base member 4410 includes a cover member 4411 and a light source 4412.

The cover member 4411 is a plate-shaped body, and is fixed to another member of the pachinko gaming machine (although not shown, for example, the gaming panel 100, etc.). The light source 4412 is a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, and is controlled by, for example, an LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6).

The base member 4420 is attached to the front surface side of the base member 4410 and can be formed in any shape such as characters, figures, characters, etc. However, in the example shown in FIG. 105, the front surface is circular and the rear surface is It is formed of a tubular body with open sides.

FIG. 106 is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by a circle A in FIG. 105.
The surface of the base member 4420 is finished so that light can be reflected, and a matte paint is applied to a part of the surface. It has a painted portion 4422 in which the above-mentioned is arranged, and a semi-painted portion 4423 in which the coating film of the matte paint is thinner than the painted portion. The base member 4420 can form any shape such as characters, figures, and characters by the unpainted portion 4421, the painted portion 4422, and the semi-painted portion 4423. However, in the example shown in FIG. 105, the shape imitates fireworks. Is formed.

According to such a paint decorative member 4400, a three-dimensional expression is possible by making the best use of the surface finish of the base member 4420 and the thickness of the coating film by the matte paint. Further, the unpainted portion 4421 is not painted, and the semi-painted portion 4423 can reduce the amount of paint as compared with the painted portion 4422. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing cost while enabling three-dimensional expression.
Further, although it is decided to apply the matte paint to a part of the surface, in addition to this, a plating process or the like may be applied to a part of the surface.

[Internal sphere flow path 4500]
FIG. 107 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the internal sphere flow path, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. In FIG. 107, the dotted line indicates a hidden line.

The internal sphere flow path 4500 is an example of an internal game medium flow path, is formed of a translucent material, has a rear surface side attached to the front side of the game panel 100 (see FIG. 4), and has a game area 105 (FIG. 4). A game ball that rolls (see) has an entry port 4511 that allows the ball to enter, and a path through which the game ball circulates is formed inside, so that the first path 4510, the intersection 4520, and the second path 4530 A third path 4540 and a distribution unit 4550 are provided. For example, the internal sphere flow path 4500 can be applied in place of the V winning device 2150 (see FIG. 60).

The first path 4510 extends in the vertical direction to form an entry port 4511 opened upward on the upper end side, and a game ball entering the entry port 4511 flows down inside.

The intersection 4520 is a portion where the first path 4510 branches into a second path 4530 and a third path 4540 extending in a direction different from the direction in which the first path 4510 extends, and has a plurality of through holes 4521 and a bottom portion. It is provided with a through hole 4522. The second path 4530 and the third path 4540 extend in different directions (in the example shown in FIG. 107, the second path 4530 extends to the right and the third path 4540 extends to the left).

The through hole 4521 is provided in the wall body forming the front surface of the intersection 4520 and is a hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and for example, a rod-shaped body for eliminating ball clogging can be inserted. The through hole 4521 is formed for each of a plurality of paths (in the example shown in FIG. 107, the second path 4530 and the third path 4540).

The distribution portion 4550 is arranged at the bottom of the intersection 4520, and the blade member protruding into the intersection 4520 from the bottom through hole 4522 of the intersection 4520 is connected to the drive unit (for example, the solenoid for V shutter 2159 (see FIG. 61)). Similarly, the solenoid, motor, etc. controlled by the main control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 61) move to the second path 4530 side or the third path 4540 side. The game ball that has flowed down from the first path 4510 is guided to the third path 4540 when the blade member of the distribution portion 4550 is arranged on the second path 4530 side, and the blade member of the distribution portion 4550 is on the third path 4540 side. If it is arranged in, it is guided to the second path 4530.

According to such an internal sphere flow path 4500, in the internal sphere flow path in which the path through which the game ball flows is formed, there is a possibility that the flow of the game ball is blocked and the ball is clogged at the intersection where the path branches. Is high. According to the internal sphere flow path 4500, a through hole 4521 penetrating from the outside to the inside path is formed in such an intersection 4520. Therefore, for example, a rod-shaped body or the like is inserted through the through hole 4521 to clog the ball. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the internal sphere flow path 4500, since a through hole 4521 penetrating from the outside to the inside path is formed in the intersection 4520 for each path, either the branched second path 4530 or the third path 4540 is formed. Even if the ball is clogged on the path side, for example, a rod-shaped body or the like can be inserted through the through hole 4521 to clear the ball clogging.
Further, as a part of the structure provided in the game area, the distribution unit 4550 is guided to one of a plurality of routes (in the example shown in FIG. 107, the second route 4530 and the third route 4540) on the downstream side. With a starting area (for example, an area having the same function as the first starting port 120 and the second starting ports 140A, 140B shown in FIG. 4) and a normal symbol gate (for example, a passing gate unit 125 shown in FIG. 4). Areas having similar functions) and the like may be provided. Further, by constantly moving the protruding blade member, the frequency of leading to the path to start the symbol variation changes depending on the protruding blade member, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Ball flow passage 4600]
FIG. 108 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the ball flow passage, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. In FIG. 108, the dotted line indicates a hidden line.

The ball flow passage 4600 is an example of a game medium flow passage, which has a front surface 4605, a bottom surface 4610, and a pair of side walls 4620 erected from both side edges of the bottom surface 4610, and is on the bottom surface 4610. Game balls circulate between the pair of side walls 4620 and are attached to the front side of the game panel 100 (see FIG. 4), and the game balls rolling in the game area 105 (see FIG. 4) are from the front 4605 side. , It is possible to enter the ball between the pair of side walls 4620. A discharge port 4611 is formed on the bottom surface 4610 on the rear end side.

The ball flow passage 4600 is erected from the bottom surface 4610, and an upright portion 4630 extending in the direction in which the ball flow passage 4600 extends is formed.

The standing portions 4630 are arranged in pairs at intervals narrower than the diameter of the game ball, and are a first inclined portion 4631 that inclines downward from the front side to the rear side and a horizontal portion that is connected to the rear end of the first inclined portion 4631. It has a 4632 and a second inclined portion 4633 that is connected to the rear end of the horizontal portion 4632 and is inclined downward. In this way, by providing a horizontal portion between the plurality of inclined portions inside the ball flow passage 4600, it is possible to roll the game ball in the ball flow passage 4600, and the interest of the game is improved. ..

According to such a ball flow passage 4600, since the standing portions 4630 that are erected from the bottom surface 4610 and extend in the direction in which the ball flow passage 4600 extends are arranged on the bottom surface 4610 in a pair, the game balls are paired. It is distributed while being supported by 4630 at two points. As a result, the game balls are stably distributed, so that the flow of the game balls becomes smooth, and it is possible to suppress the possibility of obstacles such as ball clogging.

[Mounting structure 4700]
FIG. 109 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the mounting structure, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above left in the rear direction.

The mounting structure 4700 is a structure in which a mounting member 4701 (for example, a sensor or the like) is mounted on the base 4710. The base portion 4710 is formed with an insertion portion 4711 that is fixed to another member of the pachinko gaming machine (not shown, for example, a game panel 100 or the like) and into which the mounting member 4701 is inserted.

The insertion portion 4711 is erected from the bottom of the insertion portion 4711 toward the surface of the base portion 4710 in the gap 4711a formed in the state where the mounting member 4701 is inserted and in the gap 4711a, and the tip side is placed in the insertion portion 4711. It has an engaging portion 4711b that engages with the inserted mounting member 4701. The engaging portion 4711b is made of an elastically deformable material.

The mounting member 4701 is fixed to the base portion 4710 by the fixing member 4720 in a state of being inserted into the insertion portion 4711.

The fixing member 4720 is made of, for example, a screw and has a neck portion 4721 and a head portion 4722. The neck portion 4721 is detachably fixed to the base portion 4710. The head 4722 is formed at the tip of the neck 4721, has an outer diameter larger than that of the neck 4721, and has a fixing member 4720 attached to the base 4710. This portion comes into contact with the mounting member 4701 inserted into the insertion portion 4711.

According to such a mounting structure 4700, the position of the mounting member 4701 with respect to the base 4710 is determined only by inserting the mounting member 4701 into the insertion portion 4711 of the base 4710, and in this state, the neck portion of the fixing member 4720 is inserted into the base 4710. By simply fixing the 4721, a part of the head 4722 of the fixing member 4720 comes into contact with the mounting member 4701, and the mounting member 4701 can be prevented from falling off from the insertion portion 4711 of the base portion 4710. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembling work of the gaming machine and prevent a failure due to the attachment member from falling off or the like.

Further, according to the mounting structure 4700, since the base portion 4710 is provided with an engaging portion that engages with the mounting member 4701 inserted into the insertion portion 4711 in the vicinity of the insertion portion 4711, the insertion portion is inserted into the mounting member. At this stage, the engaging portion 4711b and the mounting member 4701 are engaged. Therefore, for example, when the mounting member 4701 is attached to the base portion 4710, the mounting member 4701 is inserted from the insertion portion 4711 before the mounting member 4701 is fixed by the fixing member 4720 only by inserting the mounting member 4701 into the inserting portion 4711. It can be prevented from falling. Therefore, the work efficiency is further improved. Further, by fixing the mounting member 4701 with the fixing member 4720, the mounting member 4701 can be fixed to the base portion 4710 with a plurality of members, so that the durability is further improved.

[Ball entry device 4800]
FIG. 110 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the ball entry device, which is an example of the game device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. In FIG. 110, the game panel 100 schematically shows a portion to which the ball entry device 4800 is attached in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

The ball entry device 4800 is provided on the game panel 100, and is arranged inside the ball entry port 4801, the door member 4810 that opens and closes the ball entry port 4801, and the ball entry port 4801, and emits light. And. For example, the ball entry device 4800 can be applied in place of the special electric accessory unit 130 (see FIG. 4).

The door member 4810 is formed to be non-transmissive. The door member 4810 is rotated to the front side by a driving means (for example, a solenoid, a gear, etc.) with one end side (for example, the lower end side) as a rotation axis and the entrance ball opening 4801 is closed. For example, it has the same function as the special electric accessory 133 (see FIG. 4), and the opening and closing is controlled by the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6).

FIG. 111 is an example of a cross-sectional view of a ball entry device which is an example of a game device.
An internal space 4802 that can accept a plurality of game balls is formed inside the ball entry port 4801, and an discharge port 4803 is formed on the back side of the internal space 4802.

The light emitting member 4820 includes a light diffusing member 4821 and a light source 4822.
The light diffusing member 4821 is formed of a translucent material, and irregularities on the upper surface have predetermined regularity (for example, irregularities at predetermined intervals extend in the front-rear direction, and circular convex portions and concave portions are arranged at predetermined intervals. (Aspect, etc.) The light emitted from the light source 4822 arranged below is diffused to the upper surface side. The light source 4822 is a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, and is controlled by, for example, an LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6).

In the ball entry device 4800, when the ball entry port 4801 is closed, the inside of the ball entry port 4801 (light emitting member 4820) cannot be visually recognized, the door member 4810 is driven, and the ball entry port 4801 is opened. The light emission of the light emitting member 4820 becomes visible.

According to such a ball entry device 4800, a light emitting member 4820 that emits light is arranged inside the entry port 4801 in which a game ball can enter, and a door member 4810 that opens and closes the entry port 4801 is opaque. When the ball entry port 4801 is opened as light, the light emission of the light emitting member 4820 becomes visible. As a result, it becomes possible to illuminate the game ball entering the inside of the ball entrance 4801 with the light of the light emitting member 4820, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Induction unit 4900]
FIG. 112 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the guide portion, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above the left in the front direction. In FIG. 112, the game panel 100 schematically shows a portion to which the guide portion 4900 is attached in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

The guide unit 4900 is attached to the game panel 100 and is provided, for example, below the entry port 4901 in the path through which the game balls in the game area 105 circulate.

The guide portion 4900 includes a first surface 4910 which is the surface of the game panel 100, a second surface 4920 which is inclined downward in the front-rear direction and is arranged at an acute angle with respect to the first surface 4910, and a first surface 4910. It has a third plane 4930 that is orthogonal to each other. The second surface 4920 is also inclined in a direction orthogonal to a downwardly inclined direction (front-back direction in the example shown in FIG. 112) (left-right direction in the example shown in FIG. 112).

According to such a guiding portion 4900, the guiding portion 4900 provided in the path through which the game ball is distributed is arranged at an acute angle with respect to the first surface 4910 and the first surface 4910 by inclining downward. It has two surfaces 4920, and the second surface 4920 is also inclined in a direction orthogonal to the downwardly inclined direction. As a result, when the game ball falls on the guidance unit 4900, the game ball comes into contact with the first surface 4910 and the second surface 4920, which suppresses the blurring of the game ball and causes the game ball to smoothly tilt downward. It is possible to guide in the directions orthogonal to each other, and it is possible to prevent ball clogging.

[Third production member 5100]
113 and 114 are examples of perspective views showing the appearance of the third effect member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction.

The third effect member 5100 includes a support member 5110, a movable member 5120, and a driving means 5130.

The support member 5110 can have any shape, but for example, the support member 5110 is formed of a plate-like body to movably support the movable member 5120, and the gear insertion hole 5111, the support hole 5112, the notch 5113, and the like. Is formed. The support member 5110 is fixed to another member of the pachinko gaming machine (not shown, for example, the gaming panel 100, etc.).

The gear insertion hole 5111 is a through hole through which a part of the gear 5131 of the drive means 5130 described later is inserted. The support hole 5112 is a groove extending along the moving direction of the movable member 5120, and the support shaft 5123 extending from the rear surface of the movable member 5120 is inserted from the front side. The notch 5113 is a groove extending in the moving direction of the movable member 5120, and the cable 5121 can be arranged at a portion overlapping the movable member 5120 by moving the movable member 5120.

The movable member 5120 is formed in an arbitrary shape (cylindrical shape in the example shown in FIG. 113) such as characters, figures, and characters, is arranged at a position visible to the player, and is movably supported by the support member 5110. In either the state before the movement and the state after the movement (in the example shown in FIG. 113, the state before the movement), at least a part of the support member 5110 overlaps. The movable member 5120 includes a cable 5121, a driving force transmission unit 5122, and a support shaft 5123.

The cable 5121 is a cable that is connected to a device (for example, an LED substrate or the like) arranged inside the movable member 5120 and extends from the rear surface side of the movable member 5120 to the outside.

The driving force transmitting unit 5122 is arranged on the rear surface of the movable member 5120, extends along the moving direction of the movable member 5120, and has teeth formed to mesh with the gear 5131 of the driving means 5130 described later.

The support shaft 5123 is a shaft extending from the rear surface of the movable member 5120 to the rear side, penetrates the support hole 5112 of the support member 5110, and is subjected to a retaining process from the support hole 5112 on the rear surface side of the support member 5110. ..

The drive means 5130 is provided on the rear surface of the support member 5110, and drives the gear 5131 that meshes with the drive force transmission unit 5122 of the movable member 5120, for example, under the control of the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). The movable member 5120 is moved by being rotated by a drive unit 5132 composed of a motor.

In the initial state shown in FIG. 113, the third effect member 5100 is in a state where the support member 5110 and the movable member 5120 are overlapped with each other, and the cable 5121 of the movable member 5120 is arranged in the notch 5113 portion of the support member 5110. Has been done. Then, when the movable member 5120 is moved by the drive of the drive means 5130, the cable 5121 is arranged at a position outside the support member 5110 through the notch 5113.

According to such a third effect member 5100, the support member 5110 that movably supports the movable member 5120 is formed with a notch 5113 in which the cable 5121 can be arranged at a portion overlapping the movable member 5120. As a result, even if the cable 5121 extends from the movable member 5120, the movable range of the movable member 5120 is not limited by the cable 5121. Therefore, the movable range of the movable member 5120 can be set without being limited to the cable 5121, and the degree of freedom in design is improved.

[Fourth production member 5200]
FIG. 115 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the fourth effect member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction.

The fourth effect member 5200 includes a base member 5210 and a translucent decorative member 5220 that is translucent.

The base member 5210 includes a cover member 5211 and a light emitting member 5212 that emits light. The cover member 5211 is a plate-shaped body, and is fixed to another member of the pachinko gaming machine (although not shown, for example, the gaming panel 100, etc.). The light emitting member 5212 is a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, and is controlled by, for example, an LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6).

The translucent decorative member 5220 includes a first member 5221 and a second member 5222.
The first member 5221 is translucent, is attached to the front surface side of the second member 5222, and has a shape that bulges in the direction opposite to the direction in which the second member 5222 is arranged, and has a character, a figure, and a character. However, in the example shown in FIG. 115, it is formed of a cylindrical body having a circular shape on the front surface and an open rear surface side. Further, the first member 5221 is provided with a decoration 5221a on the front surface. The decoration 5221a can form any shape such as characters, figures, and characters, but in the example shown in FIG. 115, a shape imitating fireworks is formed.

The second member 5222 is non-translucent, is attached to the front surface side of the base member 5210, and has a shape that bulges in the direction opposite to the direction in which the first member 5221 is arranged, for example, a cylindrical shape. It has a light-shielding partition 5222a formed on the base member 5210 side, and a hole 5222b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the light-shielding partition 5222a. The hole 5222b is formed with a taper whose inner diameter increases from the rear side to the front side on the edge. This makes it possible to irradiate the light emitted from the rear side over a wider range on the front side.

According to such a fourth effect member 5200, from the front side, the first member 5221 which is translucent and is decorated, the second member 5222 in which the hole 5222b is formed, and the light emitting member 5212 are arranged in this order. By arranging the light emitting member 5212 behind the second member 5222, it is possible to irradiate the first member 5221 with the light from the light emitting member 5222 through the hole 5222b of the second member 5222. Since the front surface of the first member 5221 and the light-shielding partition 5222a in which the hole 5222b of the second member 5222 is formed are separated by a predetermined distance, in the first member 5221, from the light emitting member 5212 having the hole 5222b of the second member 5222. The outline of the light is blurred, and when viewed from the front side, the first member 5221 can produce a soft light effect.

Further, according to the fourth effect member 5200, the first member 5221 is inflated in the direction opposite to the direction in which the second member 5222 is arranged, and the second member 5222 is in the direction in which the first member 5221 is arranged. By bulging in the opposite direction, it is possible to keep a distance between the front surface of the first member 5221 and the light-shielding partition 5222a in which the hole 5222b of the second member 5222 is formed, so that a softer light effect can be produced.

[Fifth production member 5300]
FIG. 116 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the fifth effect member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above the left in the front direction.

The fifth effect member 5300 is an example of a surface light emitting decorative member capable of surface light emission, and includes a frame body 5310, a first plate member 5320, an irradiation member 5330, and a second plate member 5340. The fifth effect member 5300 is attached to, for example, the front side of the game panel 100 (see FIG. 4) and is arranged in front of the game area 105 (see FIG. 4).

FIG. 117 is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by a circle B in FIG. 116.
The frame body 5310 is attached to the game panel 100, for example, and an opening 5311 having an inner dimension smaller than the outer dimension of the first plate member 5320 is formed at a portion overlapping the first plate member 5320.

The first plate member 5320 is a plate material formed of a translucent material, has a side surface 5321, and emits light on the front surface side by light incident from the side surface 5321.

The irradiation member 5330 is an LED that irradiates light toward the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320, and is controlled by, for example, an LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). The irradiation member 5330 has a predetermined interval on the substrate along the direction in which the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320 extends (for example, the same interval as the arc-shaped portion 5342a of the second surface 5342 of the second plate member 5340 described later). And there are multiple arrays.

The second plate member 5340 is translucent and is arranged between the first plate member 5320 and the irradiation member 5330. The second plate member 5340 has a first surface 5341 facing the irradiation member 5330 and a second surface 5342 which is opposite to the first surface 5341 and faces the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320. The second surface 5342 has a plurality of arc-shaped portions 5342a formed in an arc shape bulging toward the side surface 5321 side of the first plate member 5320 continuously along the direction in which the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320 extends. It is arranged.

According to such a fifth effect member 5300, by irradiating the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320 with light, when the first plate member 5320 is viewed from the front, the first plate member 5320 itself It is possible to produce a light-emitting effect. Then, a second plate member 5340 is provided between the first plate member 5320 and the irradiation member 5330, and in the second plate member 5340, the second surface 5342 facing the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320 is formed. By forming an arc shape that bulges toward the side surface 5321 side of the first plate member 5320, the light from the irradiation member 5330 is diffused in the radial direction of the arc to the side surface 5321 of the first plate member 5320. It becomes possible to irradiate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the light emission unevenness that occurs between the position where the irradiation member 5330 exists and the position where the irradiation member 5330 does not exist in the effect that the first plate member 5320 itself emits light.

[Decorative member 5400]
118, 120 to 121 are examples of perspective views showing the appearance of a decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the front direction.
FIG. 119 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction.

The decorative member 5400 includes a base portion 5410, a first movable body 5420, a second movable body 5430, and a driving means 5440 (see FIG. 119), and has one driving means 5440 and a first movable body 5420. And the second movable body 5430 move respectively.

As shown in FIG. 119, the base portion 5410 includes a base portion main body 5411 and a base portion decoration 5412.

The base portion main body 5411 can have any shape, but for example, it is formed of a plate-like body, rotatably supports the driving means 5440, and is fixed to another member (not shown) of the pachinko gaming machine. There is.

The base portion decoration 5412 is attached to the side surface of the base portion main body 5411 and is formed in an arbitrary shape such as characters, figures, and characters (in the example shown in FIG. 119, a shape imitating 7), and is visible to the player. Placed in possible positions. The base portion decoration 5412 is point-symmetrical with respect to the driving means 5440 and is formed in pairs.

The first movable body 5420 is arranged at the foremost position of the decorative member 5400, and includes a first movable body main body 5421, a first movable body engaging portion 5422, a first movable body decoration 5423, and a cover 5424.

The first movable body main body 5421 is connected to the front end of the driving means 5440 and is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape.

The first movable body engaging portion 5422 is a hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in the first movable body main body 5421, is an arc-shaped groove centered on the driving means 5440, and is a second movable body 5430 described later. 2 The movable body engaging portion 5433 is slidably engaged. The first movable body engaging portion 5422 is point-symmetrical with respect to the driving means 5440 and is formed in pairs.

The first movable body decoration 5423 is attached to the side surface of the first movable body main body 5421, and is formed in an arbitrary shape such as a character, a figure, or a character (in the example shown in FIG. 119, a shape imitating 7). It is placed in a position that is visible to the player. The first movable body decoration 5423 is point-symmetrical with respect to the driving means 5440 and is formed in pairs.

The cover 5424 is attached to the front surface of the first movable body main body 5421, is formed in an arbitrary shape (cylindrical shape in the example shown in FIG. 119) such as characters, figures, and characters, and is arranged at a position visible to the player. Will be done.

The second movable body 5430 includes a second movable body main body 5431, an insertion hole 5432, a second movable body engaging portion 5433, and a second movable body decoration 5434.

The second movable body main body 5431 is arranged between the base portion main body 5411 and the first movable body main body 5421, and is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape.

The insertion hole 5432 is a through hole formed at substantially the center of the second movable body main body 5431 and through which the driving means 5440 penetrates.

The second movable body engaging portion 5433 is a shaft member protruding from the front surface to the front side in the second movable body main body 5431, and is slidably inserted into the first movable body engaging portion 5422 of the first movable body 5420. .. The second movable body engaging portion 5433 is point-symmetrical with respect to the driving means 5440 and is formed in a pair, and engages with the pair of first movable body engaging portions 5422, respectively. In this way, the first movable body engaging portion 5422 and the second movable body engaging portion 5433, which are the portions for transmitting the driving force, are formed in pairs so as to be point-symmetrical with respect to the center of rotation. Since the driving force can be transmitted more evenly, the rotating motion is stable.

The second movable body decoration 5434 is attached to the side surface of the second movable body main body 5431, and is formed in an arbitrary shape such as a character, a figure, or a character (in the example shown in FIG. 119, a shape imitating 7). It is placed in a position that is visible to the player. The second movable body decoration 5434 is point-symmetrical with respect to the driving means 5440 and is formed in pairs.

The drive means 5440 is rotatably supported by the base portion main body 5411, penetrates the insertion hole 5432 of the second movable body 5430, and is connected to the rear surface of the first movable body main body 5421. The drive means 5440 is rotated by, for example, being driven by a motor controlled by the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6).

The first movable body engaging portion 5422 and the second movable body engaging portion 5433 as the engaging means regulate the movable range in which the first movable body 5420 can move relative to the second movable body 5430. ..
As a result, in the decorative member 5400, from the state where the first movable body 5420 and the second movable body 5430 shown in FIG. 118 are overlapped with each other, only the first movable body 5420 shown in FIG. After the movement, as shown in FIG. 121, the first movable body 5420 and the second movable body 5430 move together.

Specifically, the decorative member 5400 starts rotating only in the first movable body 5420 when the driving means 5440 rotates from the initial state shown in FIG. 118, and is in the state shown in FIG. 120. In this state, in the decorative member 5400, the second movable body engaging portion 5433 of the second movable body 5430 comes into contact with the end of the first movable body engaging portion 5422 of the first movable body 5420. Then, when the driving means 5440 further rotates from this state, the second movable body 5430 also rotates with the rotation of the first movable body 5420, and the state shown in FIG. 121 is obtained.

Further, in the decorative member 5400, the base portion decoration 5412, the first movable body decoration 5423, and the second movable body decoration 5434 have the same shape, and in the initial state shown in FIG. 118, these are in an overlapping state, and the driving means 5440 is rotated. First, only the first movable body decoration 5423 rotates with the movement, and then the second movable body decoration 5434 rotates together with the first movable body decoration 5423. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect in which an effect member having a predetermined shape (in this embodiment, an effect member having a shape imitating 7) rotates so as to be an alter ego. The base portion decoration 5412, the first movable body decoration 5423, and the second movable body decoration 5434 may have different shapes. For example, in the initial state, they are arranged so as not to overlap each other, and the driving means 5440 can be rotated. Along with this, the effect may be such that they overlap and converge to one shape.

According to such a decorative member 5400, when the first movable body 5420 and the second movable body 5430 which are two movable bodies are moved, the relative movement of the first movable body 5420 and the second movable body 5430 is performed. By providing the first movable body engaging portion 5423 and the second movable body engaging portion 5432 to be regulated, it is possible to move only one of them and then move both of them. In addition, the reverse operation is also possible when returning to the state before the movement. As a result, it is possible to change the movements of the two movable bodies with one driving means 5440 (for example, a motor), and since there are few members for driving, the assembly man-hours and the number of parts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the amount of assembly work and manufacturing cost.
Further, an illumination is provided on the front side so as to irradiate the base portion decoration 5412, the first movable body decoration 5423, and the second movable body decoration 5434, and the rotation of the first movable body decoration 5423 and the second movable body decoration 5434. It is possible to improve the decorativeness by emitting light according to the above.
Further, the decorativeness can be further improved by subjecting the surfaces of the base portion decoration 5412, the first movable body decoration 5423, and the second movable body decoration 5434 to a plating process capable of reflecting light.

[Movable body decorative member 5500]
122, 124, and 125 are examples of perspective views showing the appearance of a movable body decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction.
FIG. 123 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a movable body decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. In FIG. 123, the dotted line indicates a hidden line.

The movable body decorative member 5500 includes a base portion 5510, a first movable member 5520, a second movable member 5530, a third movable member 5540, and a drive member 5550 (see FIG. 123), and is provided by the drive member 5550. As the first movable member 5520 rotates, the second movable member 5530 and the third movable member 5540 move in a direction away from each other or in a direction close to each other.

As shown in FIG. 123, the base portion 5510 may have an arbitrary shape. For example, the base portion 5510 is formed of a plate-like body, and has a plurality of guide holes 5511 for the second movable member and a plurality of third movable members. It is provided with a guide hole 5512 and is fixed to another member (not shown) of the pachinko gaming machine, and rotatably supports the rotating shaft 5551 of the driving member 5550 described later.

The plurality of guide holes 5511 for the second movable member are grooves extending in the moving direction of the second movable member 5530 (left-right direction in the example shown in FIG. 123), and the support member of the second movable member 5530 is slidably inserted. ..

The plurality of guide holes 5512 for the third movable member are grooves extending in the moving direction of the third movable member 5540 (left-right direction in the example shown in FIG. 123), and the support member of the third movable member 5540 is slidably inserted. ..

The first movable member 5520 is arranged on the front surface side of the base portion 5510, is formed in an arbitrary shape (in the example shown in FIG. 122, the shape in which the number 7 is three-dimensionally formed), and the rotation of the drive member 5550 described later. The shaft 5551 is connected and rotates with the rotation of the rotating shaft 5551.

The second movable member 5530 includes a second movable member decoration 5531 and a second movable member support 5532.

The second movable member decoration 5531 is arranged on the front surface side of the base portion 5510, is formed in an arbitrary shape (in the example shown in FIG. 122, the shape in which the number 7 is three-dimensionally formed), and is formed on the first movable member 5520. Along with the rotation, the first movable member 5520 moves in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis (left-right direction in the example shown in FIG. 123).

The second movable member support 5532 is an axial member arranged on the rear surface side of the base portion 5510 and extending in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the first movable member 5520 (left-right direction in the example shown in FIG. 123), which will be described later. On the surface of the driving member 5550 facing the second transmission member 5535, a tooth that engages with the tooth of the second transmission member 5555 is formed. The second movable member support 5532 is connected to the second movable member decoration 5531 by a support member penetrating the guide hole 5511 for the second movable member. The second movable member decoration 5531 and the second movable member support 5532 are provided with not only the support members connecting each other but also the support members penetrating the guide holes 5511 for the second movable member, and the second movable member is attached. The strength may be improved by performing a retaining treatment on the surface side penetrating the guide hole 5511.

The third movable member 5540 includes a third movable member decoration 5541 and a third movable member support 5542.

The third movable member decoration 5541 is arranged on the front surface side of the base portion 5510 and is formed in an arbitrary shape (in the example shown in FIG. 122, the shape in which the number 7 is three-dimensionally formed), and the first movable member 5520 Along with the rotation, the first movable member 5520 moves in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis (left-right direction in the example shown in FIG. 123).

The third movable member support 5542 is an axial member arranged on the rear surface side of the base portion 5510 and extending in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the first movable member 5520 (left-right direction in the example shown in FIG. 123), which will be described later. The surface of the driving member 5550 facing the second transmission member 5535, which faces the surface of the second movable member support 5532 on which the teeth are formed, engages with the teeth of the second transmission member 5535. Teeth are formed. The third movable member support 5542 is connected to the third movable member decoration 5541 by a support member penetrating the guide hole 5512 for the third movable member. The third movable member decoration 5541 and the third movable member support 5542 are attached not only with the support members connecting each other but also with a support member penetrating the guide hole 5512 for the third movable member, and the third movable member is attached. The strength may be improved by performing a retaining treatment on the surface side penetrating the guide hole 5512.

The drive member 5550 is rotated by being driven by a drive means (for example, a motor or the like, and is not shown), and the rotation shaft 5551 that rotates the first movable member 5520, the first transmission member 5552, and the first 2 Transmission member 5553 and.

The rotating shaft 5551 is rotatably supported by the base portion 5510, and its tip is connected to the rear surface of the first movable member 5520. The drive member 5550 is rotated by, for example, being driven by a motor controlled by the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6).

The first transmission member 5552 is a gear, is fixed to the rotating shaft 5551, and rotates with the rotation of the rotating shaft 5551.

The second transmission member 5535 is a gear, which is rotatably supported by the base portion 5510 and meshes with the first transmission member 5552, and the teeth and the third of the second movable member support 5532 of the second movable member 5530. It also meshes with the teeth of the third movable member support 5542 of the movable member 5540. As a result, the second movable member support 5532 and the third movable member support 5542 rotate with the rotation of the first transmission member 5552. Then, the second movable member support 5532 and the third movable member support 5542 having teeth formed on the surfaces facing each other move in opposite directions.

In the movable body decorative member 5500 having such a drive member 5550, as shown in FIG. 124, the first movable member 5520 is rotated by the drive of the rotation shaft 5551 from the state shown in FIG. 122, and in conjunction with this, the first movable member 5520 is rotated. , The second movable member decoration 5531 of the second movable member 5530 and the third movable member decoration 5541 of the third movable member 5540 move in opposite directions (in the example shown in FIG. 124, directions away from each other). Then, as shown in FIG. 125, in the movable body decorative member 5500, the first movable member 5520, the second movable member decoration 5531, and the third movable member decoration 5541 are arranged at predetermined intervals.

According to such a movable body decorative member 5500, the first movable member 5520 is rotated by driving the drive member 5550, and in conjunction with this, the second movable member 5530 and the third movable member 5540 are moved in opposite directions. Can be moved. As a result, it is possible to change the movement of the movable body decorative member 5500 with one drive member (for example, a motor), and since there are few members to drive, the assembly man-hours and the number of parts can be reduced, and assembly is possible. It is possible to reduce the amount of work and manufacturing cost.

[6th production member 5600]
FIG. 126 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the sixth effect member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally upward left in the rear direction.
FIG. 127 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the sixth effect member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction.

The sixth effect member 5600 includes a base 5610, a substrate 5620, a first decorative member 5630, and a second decorative member 5640.

The base 5610 is a plate-like body having a notch formed on the front side for accommodating the substrate 5620, and is fixed to another member of the pachinko gaming machine (not shown, for example, a gaming panel 100, etc.). There is.

The substrate 5620 is attached to the base 5610 and is an example of a light emitting means that emits light. A second light emitting means 5622 (see FIG. 126) is arranged to irradiate the light. The substrate 5620 is controlled by, for example, the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6) to emit light from the first light emitting means 5621 and the second light emitting means 5622. In the substrate 5620, the first light emitting means 5621 is arranged on one surface (for example, the front surface), and the second light emitting means 5622 is arranged on the other surface (for example, the rear surface). A plurality of the second light emitting means 5622 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vicinity of the inclined side edge of the substrate 5620 with the long sides along the inclined side edge in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIG. 127, the first decorative member 5630 is arranged so as to overlap the substrate 5620, and is provided with a translucent decorative portion 5631 at a position overlapping the first light emitting means 5621 and is attached to the base 5610. The decorative portion 5631 can be formed in any shape such as characters, figures, and characters, but in the example shown in FIG. 127, it is formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 126, the second decorative member 5640 is arranged in parallel with the substrate, has translucency, and emits surface light by the light radiated to the side surface 5641. The second decorative member 5640 is sandwiched between the base 5610 and the first decorative member 5630. The side surface 5641 has a plurality of light receiving side surfaces 5641a extending along the long sides of the plurality of second light emitting means 5622s formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of second light emitting means 5622s. By forming a plurality of light receiving side surfaces 5641a extending along the long sides of the plurality of second light emitting means 5622, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the side surface of the decorative member with the light from the light emitting means. Positioning of the decorative member with respect to the light emitting means becomes easy, and the work efficiency of assembly is improved.

According to the sixth effect member 5600, the first light emitting means 5621 arranged on the substrate 5620 irradiates the rear surface of the first decorative member 5630 arranged on the substrate 5620 with light and arranges the members on the same substrate. The second light emitting means 5622 makes it possible to irradiate the side surface of the second decorative member 5640 arranged in parallel with the second light emitting means 5622 with light. As a result, on one substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged, it is possible to produce an effect by decorative members having different light emitting modes from each other.

Further, according to the sixth effect member 5600, since the first light emitting means 5621 is arranged on one surface of the substrate and the second light emitting means 5622 is arranged on the other surface, the light of the first light emitting means 5621 is second. By irradiating the decorative member 5640 or the light of the second light emitting means 5622 irradiating the first decorative member 5630, it is possible to prevent an unintended light emitting mode from deteriorating the effect. can.

[7th production member 5700]
FIG. 128 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the seventh effect member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction.
FIG. 129 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the seventh effect member, which is an example of the gaming device, when viewed from diagonally upward right in the rear direction. In FIG. 129, the dotted line indicates a hidden line.

The seventh effect member 5700 includes a base member 5710 and a decorative member 5720.
The base member 5710 includes a cover member 5711 and a substrate 5713 in which a plurality of light emitting units 5712 are arranged.

The cover member 5711 is a plate-shaped body, and is fixed to other members of the pachinko gaming machine (although not shown, for example, the gaming panel 100, etc.). The light emitting unit 5712 is an LED, and the substrate 5713 is an LED substrate, which is fixed to the cover member 5711 and controlled by, for example, the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). A plurality of light emitting portions 5712 are provided at positions overlapping with the colored portion 5721 and the colorless portion 5722 of the decorative member 5720 described later.

The decorative member 5720 is attached to the front side of the cover member 5711 and can be formed in any shape such as characters, figures, and characters. However, in the example shown in FIG. 128, a substantially dish that bulges toward the front side. It is formed in a shape. The decorative member 5720 is arranged so as to be overlapped with the substrate 5713 and has a colored portion 5721 which is translucent and has a colored front side and a colorless portion 5722 which is not colored. The colored portion 5721 and the colorless portion 5722 are arranged so as to overlap with different light emitting portions 5712. The shape formed by the colored portion 5721 and the colorless portion 5722 can form any shape such as characters, figures, and characters, but in the example shown in FIG. 128, the character shape is formed.

As shown in FIG. 129, in the decorative member 5720, an engaging portion 5721a that engages with the front end of the light emitting portion 5712 is formed on the rear surface of the colored portion 5721 for each of the plurality of light emitting portions 5712. The engaging portion 5721a is formed on the rear surface side of the decorative member 5720 and is a recess that matches the shape of the upper end of the light emitting portion 5712.

According to the seventh effect member 5700, the colored portion 5721 and the colorless portion 5722 of the decorative member 5720 are arranged so as to overlap the different light emitting portions 5712. As a result, in one decorative member 5720, the colored portion 5721 can produce a colored portion that emits light, and the colorless portion 5722 has a higher brightness of light from the light emitting portion 5712 than the colored portion. In contrast to the portion, the colorless portion 5722 can be produced to shine conspicuously. Therefore, the effect of production is improved.

Further, according to the seventh effect member 5700, an engaging portion 5721a that engages with the light emitting portion 5712 is formed on the rear surface of the colored portion 5721. As a result, when assembling the substrate 5713 and the decorative member 5720, the light emitting portion 5721 and the colorless portion 5722 are placed at appropriate positions by simply aligning the light emitting portion 5712 of the substrate 5713 with the engaging portion 5721a of the colored portion 5721. It is possible to arrange and assemble 5712. Therefore, positioning is facilitated at the time of assembling a decorative member capable of a complicated effect that enables an effect in which a colored color is emitted and an effect in which a partially conspicuous shine is possible, and work efficiency at the time of assembly is improved. ..

[Protruding decorative member 5800]
FIG. 130 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a protruding decorative member, which is an example of a gaming device, when viewed from diagonally above right in the front direction. In FIG. 130, the game panel 100 schematically shows a portion to which the protruding decorative member 5800 is attached in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. In FIG. 130, the dotted line indicates a hidden line.

The protruding decorative member 5800 is provided on the front surface of the game panel 100, and is provided in the game area 105 provided with the ball entry port 5801 where the game ball flows down and the game ball enters, and is provided in the vicinity of the ball entry port 5801. , A holding portion 5810 that protrudes into the game area 105 and holds a detecting means 5802 that detects magnetism inside.

The holding portion 5810 is a hole whose rear is open, and the detecting means 5802 is inserted into this hole.
The detection means 5802 is composed of a magnetic sensor, and when magnetism is detected, outputs a magnetic sensor signal to the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6).

According to such a protruding decorative member 5800, in the game area 105 in which the game ball flows down, a detection means 5802 for detecting magnetism is provided as a part of the protruding decorative member in the vicinity of the ball entry port 5801 where the game ball enters. It can be arranged as if it were. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity using a magnet in the vicinity of the ball entry port 5801, and by arranging the detection means 5802 as if it were a part of a protruding decorative member, the game area 105 It is possible to alleviate the unnaturalness of the detection means.

Each configuration and each means of the game device can be applied to each other and can be combined as long as there is no contradiction. Further, in each configuration of the above-mentioned first to third pachinko gaming machines and the above-mentioned gaming device, any other pachinko gaming machine may be appropriately incorporated or changed within the scope of the present invention. Combinations in configuration are possible.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other gaming machines, and can be applied to, for example, bullet gaming machines and enclosed gaming machines. Further, the general-purpose technology can be applied to various gaming machines such as a gaming machine, a slot machine, a pachislot gaming machine, and the like, in addition to the gaming machines mentioned above.

<Appendix A>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game medium passing through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched game medium can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), It is provided that the player shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that is arranged in a gaming area and has a gaming device such as a ball entrance that protrudes to the front side (see JP-A-2017-113326).

However, conventionally, new models of gaming machines are intermittently required in the market, and the gaming devices attached to the new models are also required to be improved.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having an improved gaming device.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A passing area through which the game medium can pass (for example, the game panel 100, etc.) and
A protruding member (for example, a sensor holding member 3100, etc.) provided in the passing region and projecting in a predetermined direction, and
A detection means for detecting a game medium (for example, a passing gate switch 1127, etc.) and
With
The protruding member is characterized in that it can guide a game medium.

According to such a configuration, a protruding member arranged in the game area and protruding in a predetermined direction provided in the passing area can be attached to the passing area. Here, various devices for controlling the gaming machine are arranged on the rear surface side of the passing area, and the space for installing the devices is limited. According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the position where the projecting member is installed by improving the projecting member, which is a gaming device, to be attached to the passing region.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having an improved gaming device.

(2) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The protruding member is a detecting means holding member (for example, a sensor holding member) formed of a translucent material and having a guiding portion that holds the detecting means and guides a game medium that has passed through the detecting means in either the left or right direction. Member 3100 etc.)
The detection means holding member is
Attached to the passage area by a fastener (for example, fastener 3140, etc.) from the front side,
It has translucency and has a protrusion (for example, a protrusion 3111) that protrudes toward the rear surface.
The passing region includes a fastening portion (for example, a fastening portion 3151 or the like) that engages with the fastener and an insertion portion (for example, the insertion portion 3152 or the like) into which the protruding portion is inserted into the joint portion of the detection means holding member. ) And, are provided,
The inner diameter of the fastening portion and the inner diameter of the insertion portion are characterized in that they have different dimensions from each other.

According to such a configuration, the detecting means holding member holding the detecting means has a guiding portion for guiding the game medium that has passed through the detecting means in either the left or right direction, so that the guiding portion is not separately provided. It becomes possible to further roll the game medium that has passed through the detection means. Further, by attaching the detecting means holding member to the passing region by the light-transmitting protrusion in addition to the fastener, the number of fasteners can be suppressed, and the light-transmitting protrusion ensures that the protrusion is inconspicuous. It is possible to fix it in the passing area. Further, in the passing region, the inner diameter of the fastening portion that engages with the fastener and the inner diameter of the insertion portion into which the protruding portion is inserted are set to different dimensions. Easy to align the mounting position.

(3) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
It is made of a translucent material and is provided with a receiving member (for example, a ball entrance member 3200, etc.) capable of accepting a game medium.
The receiving member is
A guide passage (for example, a guide passage 3220, etc.) for guiding the accepted game medium, and
Below the portion that receives the game medium, there is a protrusion (for example, a protrusion 3230) that protrudes to the front side and has a downward slope formed on both the left and right sides.
The protrusion can guide the unaccepted game medium to the left or right.
The guide passage is characterized in that it is possible to visually recognize how the received game medium passes through.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the game medium has been accepted by making it possible to visually recognize the place where the accepted game medium is guided. Further, by providing the protrusions having slopes on the left and right at the lower part of the portion that receives the game medium, the game medium that has rolled from the left and right collides with the protrusions and is repelled in the direction away from the portion that receives the game medium. It is possible to prevent the game medium from rolling in front of the guide passage where the accepted game medium can be visually recognized, and reducing the visibility of the game medium passing through. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the game medium has been accepted.

(4) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
It is provided with a plurality of receiving members (for example, a plurality of ball entrance members 3300) which are formed of a translucent material and have a plurality of portions (for example, a ball entry port 3301 etc.) capable of accepting a game medium.
The plurality of receiving members are portions that can accept a plurality of game media, and each of the received game media has a confluent flow path (for example, a confluence flow path 3320, etc.) in which the received game media merge and circulate.
The detection means (for example, a general winning opening switch 123 or the like) detects a game medium that has circulated in the junction flow path, and detects the game medium.
It is characterized in that it is possible to give the same prize to each of the accepted game media in a portion where a plurality of game media can be accepted.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of game media are provided by providing a confluence flow path in which the received game media are merged at a portion where the plurality of game media can be accepted, and by detecting the game media circulating through the confluence flow path, the plurality of game media can be produced. Compared with the case where the detection means and the guide passage are provided for each of the acceptable parts, the number of parts can be reduced, and the number of assembly work steps and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, because it is made of a translucent material, the state of the game medium circulating in the confluence can be visually recognized, and it is possible to recognize that the same prize is given in the part where all the game media can be accepted. be able to.

(5) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A distribution member (for example, a distribution member 3400, etc.) for distributing the accepted game medium is provided.
The sorting member
A game medium passage (for example, a ball entry passage 3410, etc.) that guides the received game medium from the front side to the rear side, and
A specific area (for example, a specific area 3421, etc.) that is provided behind the game medium passage and is in an advantageous state for the player when the game medium passes through the passage.
A normal area (for example, a normal area 3422, etc.) provided behind the game medium passage and different from the specific area, and
A state in which the plane is provided behind the game medium passage and has a plane (for example, a plane 3431a or the like), the plane rotates to close the specific area, and the plane is inclined to the normal region, and the normal A displacement portion (for example, displacement portion 3431, etc.) that can be displaced and is visible from the front side in a state where the area is closed and the plane is inclined to the specific area.
It is characterized by having.

According to such a configuration, the plane provided behind the game medium passage for guiding the received game medium from the front side to the rear side rotates to close the specific area and the plane is inclined to the normal area. , The normal area is closed and the plane is inclined to a specific area, and it can be displaced. Thereby, the game medium guided from the game medium passage can be guided to either a specific area or a normal area by a plane.

(6) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A variable opening / closing member (for example, a variable entrance member 3500, etc.) having a door (for example, a door 3510, etc.) for opening / closing a portion (for example, a ball entry port 3501 or the like) capable of accepting a game medium is provided.
The door is
With one end side as the rotation axis, it rotates from the closed state to the front side and becomes the open state.
A notch (for example, notch 3511 or the like) is formed on the other end side so as to penetrate the portion where the game medium can be received from the front side in the closed state.
A downward slope (for example, slope 3511a, etc.) is formed on the side edge of the notch.

According to such a configuration, by forming a notch in a part of the door that opens and closes the part that can accept the game medium, it is possible to insert a jig into the notch and open the door at the time of maintenance. It becomes. Further, since the side edge of the notch of the door forms a downward slope, it is possible to guide the game medium downward when the game medium hits the side edge of the notch of the door.

(7) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A holding means (for example, holding means 3600 or the like) for holding the detecting means (for example, detecting means 3602 or the like) at a predetermined position is provided.
The holding means is
A main body (for example, main body 3610, etc.) that holds the detection means, and
It is characterized by having a cable holding portion (for example, a cable holding portion 3630 or the like) provided on the main body and holding a cable (for example, a cable 3602a or the like) extending from the detecting means in the vicinity of the main body.

According to such a configuration, the cable extending from the detection means can be bundled by the cable holding portion, so that the cable extending from the detection means does not get in the way during the assembly work, and the cable is hooked on another member to break the wire. Since the possibility of the cable being removed can be reduced, the work efficiency can be improved.

(8) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
With the base part (for example, base part 3710 etc.)
A first movable portion (for example, a first movable portion 3720 or the like) attached to the base portion so as to be movable in a predetermined direction,
A second movable portion (for example, a second movable portion 3730 or the like) rotatably supported by the first movable portion is provided.
The base portion
A first regulating unit (for example, a first regulating unit 3711 or the like) that extends in the predetermined direction and regulates the moving direction of the first movable unit, and
It has a second regulating unit (for example, a second regulating unit 3712, etc.) that extends in a direction different from the predetermined direction and regulates the moving direction of the second movable portion.
The second movable portion rotates while the central axis of rotation (for example, the shaft portion 3723, etc.) moves along the second restricting portion as the first movable portion moves in the predetermined direction. It is characterized by doing.

According to such a configuration, the first movable portion is simply moved in a predetermined direction, and the second movable portion is rotated while moving the central axis of rotation without using a power member such as a motor. Since it is possible to perform complicated operations, it is possible to produce a more advanced effect while reducing the number of members.

(9) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A base shaft extending in a predetermined direction (for example, a base shaft 3810, etc.) and
A movable portion (for example, a movable portion 3820 or the like) that is pivotally supported by the base shaft and rotates about the base shaft is provided.
A plurality of base teeth (for example, base tooth portions 3812) extending in the predetermined direction and arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the base shaft are formed on the outer periphery of the base shaft.
The movable part is
A movable shaft (for example, a movable shaft 3823, etc.) extending in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction and having a spiral-shaped movable tooth (for example, a movable tooth 3823a, etc.) formed on the outer circumference thereof.
The movable shaft is provided with a drive unit (for example, a drive unit 3822 or the like) that rotates the movable shaft around the axis of the movable shaft.
The movable tooth engages with the base tooth, and the movable shaft rotates to rotate about the base shaft.

According to such a configuration, a drive unit for rotating the movable portion is provided in the movable portion that rotates around the base shaft, and the movable shaft of the movable portion is rotated by the drive portion, so that the movable portion is rotated. Is rotated around the base axis. Therefore, as compared with the case where a rotation shaft for rotating the drive unit and the movable portion is provided and the rotation shaft is rotated to rotate the movable portion, the load due to the weight of the movable portion on the rotating shaft can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to rotate a larger movable portion.

(10) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The movable shaft is provided with a grip portion (for example, a grip portion 3825 or the like) capable of gripping and rotating the movable shaft.

According to such a configuration, the movable portion that rotates from the initial position to the movable position may not return to an appropriate initial position when the operation is repeated. In such a case, the movable portion can be returned to an appropriate position by rotating the movable shaft by the grip portion.

(11) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A base shaft extending in a predetermined direction (for example, a base shaft 3810, etc.) and
A movable portion (for example, a movable portion 3820 or the like) that is pivotally supported by the base shaft and rotates about the base shaft is provided.
On either one of the base shaft or the movable portion, a plurality of position detecting means (for example, position detecting means 3831a, 3831b, 3831c, etc.) arranged in the rotation direction of the movable portion are provided in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the other. Have and
The plurality of position detecting means are characterized in that the position of the movable portion with respect to the base axis is detected.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of position detecting means are provided on either the base shaft or the movable portion, which are arranged in the rotation direction of the movable portion and detect the position of the movable portion with respect to the reference position of the base shaft. .. As a result, a plurality of positions of the movable portion with respect to the base axis can be reliably detected, so that the state of the movable portion at the plurality of positions can be appropriately managed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having an improved gaming device.

<Appendix B>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game medium passing through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched game medium can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), It is provided that the player shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that is arranged in a gaming area and has a gaming device such as a ball entrance that protrudes to the front side (see JP-A-2017-113326).

However, conventionally, new models of gaming machines are intermittently required in the market, and the gaming devices attached to the new models are also required to be improved.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having an improved gaming device.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A passing area through which the game medium can pass (for example, the game panel 100, etc.) and
A moving member (for example, a moving member 4131, etc.) that changes the game medium from an acceptable state to an unacceptable state.
It is characterized by having.

According to such a configuration, the game device can change the game medium from an acceptable state to an unacceptable state, and can change the route for guiding the game medium.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having an improved gaming device.

(2) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The moving member is arranged on a portion that can accept the game medium (for example, a specific area 4122 or the like), and moves in a predetermined direction to change the game medium from an acceptable state to an unacceptable state.
The moving member has a top portion (for example, a top portion 4131b, etc.) formed at an end portion in the predetermined direction, and an inclined portion (for example, an inclined portion 4131c, etc.) whose width extends from the top portion.
The inclined portion is characterized in that an inclined surface (for example, an inclined surface 4131d or the like) inclined from an edge to a central side is formed from an upper surface to a lower surface of the moving member.

According to such a configuration, a moving member that moves the game medium from an acceptable state to an unacceptable state by moving in a predetermined direction has a top formed at an end in a predetermined direction and a width from the top. The inclined portion has an inclined portion in which the moving member is widened, and an inclined surface is formed in the inclined portion so as to be inclined from the edge to the center side from the upper surface to the lower surface of the moving member. As a result, the moving member has a pointed structure, and it becomes easy to guide the game medium to the route for guiding the game medium. Even if the moving member and the game medium come into contact with each other, the game medium is between the moving member and the other member. Since it is possible to prevent the ball from being caught in the ball, it is possible to prevent the ball from being jammed.

(3) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
It is provided near the exit of a launch passage (for example, launch passage 110a, etc.) through which a game medium launched from a launch device (for example, launch device 6 or the like) passes, and enables the game medium to exit from the launch passage. A return game medium prevention structure (for example, a return ball prevention structure 4200, etc.) that prevents the game medium from entering the launch passage from the outlet is provided.
The return game medium prevention structure
A fixed shaft (eg, fixed shaft 4210, etc.) fixed in the vicinity of the outlet of the launch passage, and
It has a rotating member (for example, a rotating member 4220, etc.) that is rotatably provided around the fixed shaft.
The rotating member
Above the fixed shaft, at the initial position, a protrusion (for example, a protrusion 4221 or the like) arranged in the flow path of the game medium exiting the launch passage, and
A first weight portion extending downward from the fixed shaft (for example, the first weight portion 4222, etc.) and
It has a second weight portion (for example, a second weight portion 4223, etc.) arranged on the tip end side of the protrusion.
The weight of the first weight portion is heavier than the combined weight of the protrusion portion and the second weight portion.

According to such a configuration, in the initial position, the protrusion is arranged in the flow path of the game medium due to the weight of the first weight portion. Then, when the game medium that has passed through the launch passage collides with the protrusion, the rotating member rotates, and the game medium moves to the game area. After that, the protrusion returns to the initial position due to the weight of the first weight portion. At this time, if the weight difference between the first weight portion and the protrusion portion is large, it may take time to stabilize at the initial position due to a reaction to return to the initial position or the like. According to the present invention, in the return game medium prevention structure, since the second weight portion is provided on the tip end side of the protrusion portion opposite to the first weight portion across the fixed shaft, the second weight portion is fired after the rotating member is rotated. Since the protrusion that prevents the game medium from entering the passage can be returned to the initial position more quickly than when the second weight portion is not provided, it is possible to prevent the return game medium more effectively. It becomes.

(4) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A movable decorative member (for example, a movable decorative member 4300, etc.) is provided.
The movable decorative member is
A first accessory (for example, the first accessory 4320, etc.) that can rotate around a predetermined position (for example, a rotation shaft 4312, etc.) and
A second accessory (for example, a second accessory 4330, etc.) arranged behind the first accessory, which can rotate around the predetermined position,
It has a drive unit (for example, a drive unit 4340, etc.) for rotating the first accessory and the second accessory.
The drive unit
A first engaging portion (for example, a first engaging portion 4342, etc.) for rotating the first accessory by engaging with the first accessory and rotating about the drive shaft.
By engaging with the second accessory and rotating around the drive shaft, the second engaging portion (for example, the second engaging portion 4343, etc.) for rotating the second accessory It is characterized by having.

According to such a configuration, in the drive unit, by rotating around the drive shaft, the first accessory is rotated by the first engaging portion, and the second accessory is rotated by the second engaging portion. Move. As a result, it is possible to change the movements of two accessories with one drive unit, and since there are few members to drive, the number of assembly man-hours and the number of parts can be reduced, and the amount of assembly work and manufacturing cost can be suppressed. Is possible.

(5) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The second engaging portion has an arc portion (for example, an arc portion 4343a or the like) formed in a substantially arc shape centered on the drive shaft.
The second accessory does not rotate while in contact with the intermediate portion of the arc portion, and the second engaging portion rotates around the drive shaft and hits the end portion of the arc portion. It is characterized in that it rotates around the predetermined position at the point of contact.

According to such a configuration, the first accessory rotates about the drive shaft, while the second accessory does not rotate while in contact with the intermediate portion of the arc portion, and the second accessory does not rotate. When the joint portion rotates around the drive shaft and comes into contact with the end portion of the arc portion, it rotates around a predetermined position. As a result, it is possible to make the two accessories have different operation modes with one drive unit, and since there are few members for driving, the assembly man-hours and the number of parts can be reduced, and the assembly work amount and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. It is possible to suppress the problem and to diversify the production mode.

(6) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A painted decorative member (for example, a painted decorative member 4400 or the like) having a base member (for example, a base member 4420 or the like) whose surface is finished so as to be able to reflect light and a matte paint is applied to a part of the surface. It is a game machine equipped with
The base member is on the surface.
An unpainted portion (for example, an unpainted portion 4421, etc.) to which the matte paint is not arranged,
A painted portion (for example, a painted portion 4422, etc.) on which the matte paint is arranged,
It is characterized by having a semi-painted portion (for example, a semi-painted portion 4423 or the like) in which the coating film of the matte paint is thinner than the coated portion.

According to such a configuration, the surface finish of the base member is utilized, and the thickness of the coating film with the matte paint enables three-dimensional expression. In addition, the unpainted portion is not painted, and the semi-painted portion can reduce the amount of paint as compared with the painted portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing cost while enabling three-dimensional expression.

(7) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A gaming machine provided with an internal gaming medium flow path (for example, an internal ball flow path 4500, etc.) in which a path through which the gaming medium is distributed is formed.
The internal game medium flow path is
A said path (eg, first path 4510, etc.) has a branching intersection (eg, crossing section 4520, etc.) that branches into a plurality of said paths (eg, second path 4530, third path 4540, etc.). ,
A through hole (for example, a through hole 4521 or the like) penetrating from the outside to the inside path is formed at the intersection.

According to such a configuration, in the internal game medium flow path in which the path through which the game medium is distributed is formed inside, there is a high possibility that the flow of the game medium is blocked and the game medium is clogged at the intersection where the route branches. ..
According to the present invention, since a through hole penetrating from the outside to the inside path is formed at such an intersection, for example, a rod-shaped body or the like can be inserted through the through hole to eliminate the clogging of the game medium. It will be possible.

(8) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The through hole is characterized in that it is formed for each of the plurality of paths.

According to such a configuration, a through hole penetrating from the outside to the inside path is formed at the intersection for each path. Therefore, even if the game medium is clogged on any of the branched paths, the through hole is formed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to insert a rod-shaped body or the like to eliminate the clogging of the game medium.

(9) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A gaming machine provided with a gaming medium flow passage (for example, a ball flow passage 4600, etc.) through which a gaming medium is distributed.
The game medium flow passage is erected from the bottom surface (for example, the bottom surface 4610 or the like), and an upright portion (for example, the upright portion 4630 or the like) extending in the direction in which the game medium flow passage extends is formed.
The standing portions are arranged in pairs at intervals narrower than the diameter of the game medium.

According to such a configuration, a pair of standing portions that are erected from the bottom surface and extend in the direction in which the game medium flow passage extends are arranged on the bottom surface of the game medium flow passage, so that the game medium is formed by the pair of standing portions. It is distributed while being supported by two points. As a result, the game medium is stably distributed, so that the flow of the game medium becomes smooth, and it is possible to suppress the possibility of trouble such as clogging of the game medium.

(10) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A gaming machine having a mounting structure (for example, mounting structure 4700, etc.) to which a mounting member is mounted on the base.
The base portion is formed with an insertion portion (for example, insertion portion 4711 or the like) into which the mounting member is inserted.
The mounting member is fixed to the base portion by a fixing member (for example, a fixing member 4720 or the like) in a state of being inserted into the insertion portion.
The fixing member is
A neck portion (for example, neck portion 4721, etc.) that is detachably fixed to the base portion and
It has a head (for example, head 4722, etc.) formed at the tip of the neck and having an outer diameter larger than that of the neck.
A part of the head is in contact with the mounting member.

According to such a configuration, the position of the mounting member with respect to the base is determined only by inserting the mounting member into the insertion portion of the base, and in this state, the neck portion of the fixing member is simply fixed to the base to form the fixing member. It is possible to prevent a part of the head from coming into contact with the mounting member and the mounting member from falling off from the insertion portion of the base. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembling work of the gaming machine and prevent a failure due to the attachment member from falling off or the like.

(11) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The base portion is characterized in that an engaging portion (for example, an engaging portion 4711b or the like) that engages with the mounting member inserted into the insertion portion is formed in the insertion portion.

According to such a configuration, since the engaging portion that engages with the mounting member inserted into the insertion portion is provided in the vicinity of the insertion portion at the base portion, the engaging portion is engaged when the insertion portion is inserted into the mounting member. The joint and the mounting member engage. Therefore, for example, when the mounting member is attached to the base portion, it is possible to prevent the mounting member from falling from the insertion portion before the mounting member is fixed by the fixing member simply by inserting the mounting member into the insertion portion. .. Therefore, the work efficiency is further improved. Further, by fixing the mounting member with the fixing member, the mounting member can be fixed to the base with a plurality of members, so that the durability is further improved.

(12) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A gaming machine including a door member (for example, a door member 4810, etc.) that opens and closes a portion (for example, a ball entrance 4801, etc.) that can accept a game medium.
A light emitting member (for example, a light emitting member 4820 or the like) that emits light is arranged inside a portion that can accept the game medium.
The door member is non-transmissive and is non-transmissive.
The portion that can accept the game medium is characterized in that the inside cannot be visually recognized in the closed state, and the light emission of the light emitting member becomes visible in the open state.

According to such a configuration, a light emitting member that emits light is arranged inside a portion that can accept the game medium, and a door member that opens and closes the portion that can accept the game medium is made non-transparent, and the game medium is made. When the acceptable portion is in the open state, the light emission of the light emitting member becomes visible. As a result, it becomes possible to illuminate the game medium entering the inside of the portion where the game medium can be accepted with the light of the light emitting member, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(13) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
In the route through which the game medium is distributed, a guide unit (for example, a guide unit 4900, etc.) for guiding the game medium is provided.
The guide portion includes a first surface (for example, the first surface 4910 and the like) and a second surface (for example, the second surface 4920 and the like) that is inclined downward and arranged at an acute angle with respect to the first surface. Have,
The second surface is also inclined in a direction orthogonal to the downwardly inclined direction.

According to such a configuration, the guide portion provided in the path through which the game medium is distributed has a first surface and a second surface that is inclined downward and arranged at an acute angle with respect to the first surface. However, the second surface is also inclined in a direction orthogonal to the downwardly inclined direction. As a result, when the game medium falls on the guide portion, the game medium comes into contact with the first surface and the second surface, suppresses blurring of the game medium, and makes the game medium smoothly orthogonal to the downwardly inclined direction. It is possible to guide the game medium to prevent clogging of the game medium.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having an improved gaming device.

<Appendix C>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game medium passing through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched game medium can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), It is provided that the player shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine having a gaming device in which a decorative member is movable has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-88844).

However, conventionally, new models of gaming machines are intermittently required in the market, and the gaming devices attached to the new models are also required to be improved.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having an improved gaming device.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Movable members that can be moved by the driving means (for example, movable member 5120, etc.)
A gaming machine including a support member (for example, a support member 5110, etc.) that movably supports the movable member.
The movable member is characterized in that at least a part thereof overlaps with the support member in either the state before the movement and the state after the movement.

According to such a configuration, at least a part of the movable member and the support member that movably supports the movable member overlap each other in either the state before the movement or the state after the movement. Therefore, the installation space can be reduced and the degree of freedom in design is improved.

(2) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The support member is characterized in that a notch (for example, notch 5113 or the like) on which a cable (for example, cable 5121 or the like) can be arranged is formed in a portion that overlaps with the movable member due to the movement of the movable member. And.

According to such a configuration, the support member that movably supports the movable member is formed with a notch in which the cable can be arranged at a portion that overlaps with the movable member. As a result, even if the cable extends from the movable member, the movable range of the movable member is not limited by this cable. Therefore, the movable range of the movable member can be set without being limited to the cable, and the degree of freedom in design is improved.

(3) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A gaming machine including a light emitting member that emits light (for example, a light emitting member 5212 or the like) and a translucent decorative member (for example, a translucent decorative member 5220 or the like).
The translucent decorative member is
A first member that is translucent and decorated (eg, first member 5221, etc.)
It has a second member (for example, second member 5222, etc.) that is non-transmissive, is arranged between the light emitting member and the first member, and has a hole (for example, hole 5222b, etc.) formed therein. death,
The first member and the second member are arranged at a predetermined distance from each other.

According to such a configuration, the first member which is translucent and is decorated, the second member having holes formed, and the light emitting member are arranged in this order from the front side, and the light emitting member is arranged behind the second member. By arranging the above, it is possible to irradiate the first member with the light from the light emitting member through the hole of the second member. Since the first member and the second member are separated by a predetermined distance, the outline of the light from the light emitting member having the holes of the second member is blurred in the first member, and when viewed from the front side, the first member It is possible to produce with soft light.

(4) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The first member has a shape that bulges in a direction opposite to the direction in which the second member is arranged.
The second member is characterized in that it has a shape that bulges in a direction opposite to the direction in which the first member is arranged.

According to such a configuration, the first member is bulged in the direction opposite to the direction in which the second member is arranged, and the second member is bulged in the direction opposite to the direction in which the first member is arranged. Therefore, since the distance between the first member and the second member can be further increased, it is possible to produce a softer light.

(5) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A surface emitting decorative member capable of surface emitting (for example, a fifth effect member 5300, etc.) is provided.
The surface emitting decorative member is
A first plate member (eg, first plate member 5320, etc.) that is translucent and has side surfaces (eg, side surface 5321, etc.) and
An irradiation member (for example, an irradiation member 5330, etc.) that irradiates light toward the side surface of the first plate member,
It is translucent and includes a second plate member (for example, a second plate member 5340, etc.) arranged between the first plate member and the irradiation member.
The second plate member is a second surface which is opposite to the first surface (for example, the first surface 5341 or the like) facing the irradiation member and faces the side surface of the first plate member. (For example, the second surface 5342, etc.)
The second surface is characterized in that it is formed in an arc shape that bulges toward the side surface side of the first plate member.

According to such a configuration, by irradiating the light toward the side surface of the first plate member, it is possible to produce an effect that the first plate member itself emits light when the first plate member is viewed from the front. It will be possible. Then, a second plate member is provided between the first plate member and the irradiation member, and in the second plate member, the second surface facing the side surface of the first plate member is a side surface of the first plate member. By forming the arc shape that bulges sideways, the light from the irradiation member can be diffused in the radial direction of the arc to irradiate the side surface of the first plate member. As a result, it is possible to reduce the light emission unevenness that occurs between the position where the irradiation member exists and the position where the irradiation member does not exist in the effect that the first plate member itself emits light.

(6) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A decorative member (for example, a decorative member 5400) on which the movable body moves is provided.
The decorative member is
A first movable body (for example, a first movable body 5420, etc.) and a second movable body (for example, a second movable body 5430, etc.) that overlap each other,
It has a driving means (for example, a driving means 5440, etc.) for driving the first movable body or the second movable body.
The first movable body and the second movable body have engaging means (for example, a first movable body engaging portion 5423 and a second movable body engaging portion 5432) that engage with each other.
The engaging means regulates the range of movement in which the first movable body can move relative to the second movable body.
After the first movable body and the second movable body are overlapped with each other and only the first movable body moves in the moving range by the driving of the driving means, the first movable body and the second movable body are moved. Is characterized by moving together.

According to such a configuration, when moving two movable bodies, by providing an engaging means for restricting the relative movement of the two movable bodies, only one of them is moved and then both are moved. Is possible. In addition, the reverse operation is also possible when returning to the state before the movement. As a result, it is possible to change the movements of the two movable bodies with one driving means (for example, a motor), and since there are few members to drive, the assembly man-hours and the number of parts can be reduced, and the assembly can be performed. It is possible to reduce the amount of work and manufacturing cost.

(7) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A movable body decorative member (for example, a movable body decorative member 5500, etc.) on which the movable body moves is provided.
The movable body decorative member is
A rotating first movable member (for example, first movable member 5520, etc.) and
A second movable member (for example, a second movable member 5530, etc.) and a third movable member (for example, an example) that move in opposite directions,
It has the first movable member, the second movable member, or a drive member for driving the third movable member (for example, a third movable member 5540 or the like).
The driving of the driving member causes the first movable member to rotate, and in conjunction with this, the second movable member and the third movable member move in opposite directions to each other.

According to such a configuration, the first movable member can be rotated by driving the drive member, and the second movable member and the third movable member can be moved in opposite directions in conjunction with the rotation of the first movable member. As a result, it is possible to change the movement of the movable body decorative member with one drive member (for example, a motor), and since there are few members to drive, the assembly man-hours and the number of parts can be reduced, and the assembly work can be performed. It is possible to reduce the quantity and manufacturing cost.

(8) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A substrate on which a light emitting means for emitting light is arranged (for example, a substrate 5620, etc.) and
A first decorative member (for example, a first decorative member 5630, etc.), which is arranged so as to be overlapped with the substrate and is translucent,
A second decorative member (for example, a second decorative member 5640, etc.), which is arranged in parallel with the light emitting means and is translucent, is provided.
The light emitting means
A first light emitting means (for example, a first light emitting means 5621 or the like) that irradiates the rear surface of the first decorative member with light.
A second light emitting means (for example, a second light emitting means 5622, etc.) that irradiates the side surface of the second decorative member with light,
It is characterized by including.

According to such a configuration, the first light emitting means arranged on the substrate irradiates the rear surface of the first decorative member arranged on the substrate with light, and the second light emitting means arranged on the same substrate emits light. It is possible to irradiate the side surface of the second decorative member arranged in parallel with the light emitting means with light. As a result, on one substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged, it is possible to produce an effect by decorative members having different light emitting modes from each other.

(9) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
On the substrate
The first light emitting means is arranged on one surface, and the first light emitting means is arranged.
The second light emitting means is arranged on the other surface.

According to such a configuration, since the first light emitting means is arranged on one surface of the substrate and the second light emitting means is arranged on the other surface, the light of the first light emitting means irradiates the second decorative member. It is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered due to an unintended light emitting mode due to the fact that the light of the second light emitting means irradiates the first decorative member.

(10) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A substrate (for example, a substrate 5713, etc.) in which a plurality of light emitting units (for example, a light emitting unit 5712, etc.) are arranged, and a substrate (for example, a substrate 5713, etc.)
A decorative member (for example, a decorative member 5720, etc.) that is arranged so as to be overlapped with the substrate and is translucent is provided.
The decorative member has a colored portion (for example, a colored portion 5721 etc.) and an uncolored colorless portion (for example, a colorless portion 5722 etc.).
The colored portion and the colorless portion are arranged so as to overlap with the different light emitting portions.

According to such a configuration, the colored portion and the colorless portion of the decorative member are arranged so as to overlap with different light emitting portions. As a result, in one decorative member, it is possible to produce an effect in which the colored portion emits light in the colored portion, and the brightness of the light emitted by the light emitting portion is higher in the colorless portion than in the colored portion. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect in which the colorless part shines conspicuously. Therefore, the effect of production is improved.

(11) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The decorative member is characterized in that an engaging portion (for example, an engaging portion 5721a or the like) that engages with the light emitting portion is formed on the rear surface of the colored portion.

According to such a configuration, an engaging portion that engages with the light emitting portion is formed on the rear surface of the colored portion. As a result, when assembling the substrate and the decorative member, the light emitting portion can be arranged and assembled at appropriate positions of the colored portion and the colorless portion simply by aligning the light emitting portion of the substrate with the engaging portion of the colored portion. It becomes. Therefore, positioning is facilitated at the time of assembling a decorative member capable of a complicated effect that enables an effect in which a colored color is emitted and an effect in which a partially conspicuous shine is possible, and work efficiency at the time of assembly is improved. ..

(12) As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A game area (for example, a game area 105, etc.) in which a game medium flows down and a portion (for example, a ball entrance 5801, etc.) that can accept the game medium is provided.
A protruding decorative member (for example, a protruding decorative member 5800, etc.) projecting into the game area is provided.
The protruding decorative member projects a holding portion (for example, holding portion 5810 or the like) that projects into the game region and holds a detecting means (for example, detecting means 5802 or the like) for detecting magnetism in the vicinity of a portion that can accept the game medium. It is characterized by having.

According to such a configuration, in the game area where the game medium flows down, the detection means for detecting magnetism is arranged in the vicinity of the portion where the game medium can be received as if it is a part of the protruding decorative member. Is possible. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent acts using magnets in the vicinity of the portion where the game medium can be accepted, and by arranging the detection means as if it were a part of the protruding decorative member, the game area. It is possible to alleviate the unnaturalness of the detection means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having an improved gaming device.

6 Launcher 100 Game panel 105 Game area 110a Launch passage 123 General winning opening switch 1127 Passing gate switch 3100 Sensor holding member 3111 Protruding part 3121 Entering port 3140 Fastener 3151 Fastening part 3152 Inserting part 3200 Entering port member 3201 Entering port 3220 Guidance passage 3230 Protrusion 3300 Multiple entry port member 3301 Inlet port 3320 Conjugation channel 3400 Sorting member 3401 Inlet ball passage 3421 Specific area 3422 Normal area 3431 Displacement part 3431a Flat surface 3500 Variable entry port member 3501 Ball mouth 3510 Door 3511 Notch 3511a Slope 3600 Holding means 3602 Detection means 3602a Cable 3610 Main body 3630 Cable holding part 3710 Base part 3711 First regulation part 3712 Second regulation part 3720 First movable part 3723 Shaft part 3730 Second movable part 3810 Base shaft 3812 Base tooth 3820 Movable part 3822 Drive part 3823 Movable shaft 3823a Movable tooth 3825 Gripping part 3831a Position detecting means 3831b Position detecting means 3831c Position detecting means 4122 Specific area 4131 Moving member 4131b Top 4131c Inclined part 4131d Inclined surface 4200 Ball prevention structure 4210 Fixed shaft 4220 Rotating member 4221 Protruding part 4222 1st weight part 4223 2nd weight part 4300 Movable decorative member 4312 Rotating shaft 4320 1st accessory 4330 2nd accessory 4340 Drive 4342 1st engaging 4343 2nd Engagement part 4343a Arc part 4400 Painted decorative member 4420 Base member 4421 Unpainted part 4422 Painted part 4423 Semi-painted part 4510 First path 4520 Crossing part 4521 Through hole 4530 Second path 4540 Third path 4600 Ball flow passage 4610 Bottom surface 4630 Standing Installation part 4700 Mounting structure 4711 Insertion part 4711b Engagement part 4720 Fixing member 4721 Neck part 4722 Head 4801 Ball entrance 4810 Door member 4890 Light emitting member 4900 Guidance part 4910 First surface 4920 Second surface 5110 Support member 5113 Notch 5120 Movable member 5121 Cable 5212 Light emitting member 5220 Translucent decorative member 5221 First member 5222 Second member 5222b Hole 5300 Fifth effect member 5320 First plate member 5321 Side surface 5330 Irradiation member 5340 Second plate member 5341 First surface 5342 2nd surface 5400 Decorative member 5420 1st movable body 5423 1st movable body engaging part 5430 2nd movable body 5432 2nd movable body engaging part 5440 Driving means 5500 Movable body decorative member 5520 1st movable member 5530 2nd movable member 5540 Third movable member 5620 Board 5621 First light emitting means 5622 Second light emitting means 5630 First decorative member 5640 Second decorative member 5712 Light emitting part 5713 Board 5720 Decorative member 5721 Colored part 5721a Engaging part 5722 Colorless part 5800 Protruding decorative member 5801 Ball entry 5802 Detection means 5810 Holding unit

Claims (1)

A lottery related to the game is performed according to the entry of the game medium into the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and the first based on the entry into the first starting winning opening according to the lottery result. The second special symbol based on the special symbol or the entry into the second starting winning opening is changed, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has become a predetermined special display mode. It is equipped with a main control means that can control a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player accordingly.
The main control means is processing that the special gaming state can be controlled based on one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the other special symbol is changing. If this is the case, the gaming machine is characterized in that a process of forcibly losing the display result of the other special symbol is performed.

Images